Asus TS300-E3 User Manual
TS300-E3/PA4 & PS4 Intel î Pentium î 4/Pentium î D LGA775 Pedestal/5U Rackmount S e r v e r 1066/800 MHz Front Side Bus
ii Copyright é 2006 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). ASUS provides this manual âÂÂas isâ without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties or conditions of merchantability or ï¬Âtness for a particular purpose. In no event shall ASUS, its directors, ofï¬Âcers, employees, or agents be liable for any indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages (including damages for loss of proï¬Âts, loss of business, loss of use or data, interruption of business and the like), even if ASUS has been advised of the possibility of such damages arising from any defect or error in this manual or product. Speciï¬Âcations and information contained in this manual ae furnished for informational use only , and are subject to change at any time without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by ASUS. ASUS assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual, including the products and software described in it. Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiï¬Âed or altered, unless such repair , modiï¬Âcation of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identiï¬Âcation or explanation and to the ownersü beneï¬Ât, without intent to infringe. E2369 Revised Edition V2 January 2006
iii Contents Notices ........................................................................................................ vii Safety information .................................................................................... viii About this guide ......................................................................................... ix Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 System package contents ........................................................... 1-2 1.2 System speciï¬Âcations ................................................................. 1-3 1.2 System speciï¬Âcations ................................................................. 1-4 1.3 Front panel features ..................................................................... 1-5 1.4 Rear panel features ...................................................................... 1-6 1.5 Internal features ........................................................................... 1-7 1.6 LED information ........................................................................... 1-9 Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2.1 Chassis cover ............................................................................... 2-2 2.1.1 Removing the side cover ................................................ 2-2 2.1.2 Reinstalling the side cover .............................................. 2-3 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................... 2-5 2.3.1 Installing the CPU ........................................................... 2-5 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and airduct assembly .......... 2-8 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-10 2.4.1 Overview ....................................................................... 2-10 2.4.2 Memory conï¬Âgurations .................................................. 2-10 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ...........................................................2-1 1 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM .........................................................2-1 1 2.5 Front panel assembly ................................................................ 2-12 2.5.1 Removing the front panel assembly .............................. 2-1 2 2.5.2 Reinstalling the front panel assembly ........................... 2-1 4 2.6 5.25-inch drives .......................................................................... 2-15 2.7 Hard disk drives ......................................................................... 2-18 2.7.1 Installing a hot-swap SA T A/SCSI HDD ......................... 2-18 2.7.2 Installing an HDD dummy cover ................................... 2-20 2.8 Expansion cards ........................................................................ 2-21 2.8.1 Installing an expansion card ......................................... 2-21 2.8.2 Removing an expansion card ....................................... 2-22
iv Contents 2.9 Cable connections ..................................................................... 2-23 2.9.1 Motherboard connections ............................................. 2-23 2.9.2 SA T A backplane connections ....................................... 2 -24 2.9.3 SCSI backplane connections ........................................ 2-27 2.10 Removable components ............................................................ 2-30 2.10.1 Chassis fan ................................................................... 2-30 2.10.2 HDD blower ................................................................... 2-32 2.10.3 SA T A/SCSI backplane .................................................. 2-35 2.10.4 Floppy disk drive ........................................................... 2-37 2.10.5 Front I/O board .............................................................. 2-39 2.10.6 Chassis footpads and roller wheels .............................. 2-4 1 2.10.7 Power supply unit .......................................................... 2-43 Chapter 3: Installation option Preparing the system for rack mounting ................................................ 3-2 Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4.1 Motherboard layouts .................................................................... 4-2 4.2 Jumpers ........................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Internal connectors .................................................................... 4-10 Chapter 5: BIOS information 5.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 5-2 5.1.1 Creating a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk ....................................... 5-2 5.1.2 AFUDOS utility ................................................................ 5-3 5.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ...................................... 5-6 5.1.4 ASUS Update utility ........................................................ 5-8 5.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................. 5-1 1 5.2.1 BIOS menu screen ........................................................ 5-12 5.2.2 Menu bar ....................................................................... 5-12 5.2.3 Navigation keys ............................................................. 5-12 5.2.4 Menu items ................................................................... 5-13 5.2.5 Sub-menu items ............................................................ 5-13 5.2.6 Conï¬Âguration ï¬Âelds ....................................................... 5-13 5.2.7 Pop-up window ............................................................. 5-13 5.2.8 Scroll bar ....................................................................... 5-13 5.2.9 General help ................................................................. 5-13
v Contents 5.3 Main menu .................................................................................. 5-14 5.3.1 System T ime ................................................................ 5-14 5.3.2 System Date ............................................................... 5-14 5.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ........................................................ 5-14 5.3.4 IDE Conï¬Âguration .......................................................... 5-15 5.3.5 Primary , Secondary , Third, Fourth IDE Master/Slave ... 5-16 5.3.6 System Information ....................................................... 5-18 5.4 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 5-19 5.4.1 MPS Conï¬Âguration ........................................................ 5-19 5.4.2 CPU Conï¬Âguration ........................................................ 5-20 5.4.3 Chipset Conï¬Âguration ................................................... 5-22 5.4.4 Onboard Devices Conï¬Âguration .................................... 5-26 5.4.5 PCI PnP ........................................................................ 5-27 5.5 Power Conï¬Âguration .................................................................. 5-28 5.5.1 ACPI APIC support ....................................................... 5-28 5.5.2 APM conï¬Âguration ......................................................... 5-28 5.5.3 Hardware Monitor ......................................................... 5-31 5.6 Server menu ............................................................................... 5-33 Remote Access Conï¬Âguration ...................................................... 5-33 5.7 Boot menu .................................................................................. 5-35 5.7.1 Boot Device Priority ...................................................... 5-35 5.7.2 Boot Settings Conï¬Âguration .......................................... 5-36 5.7.3 Security ......................................................................... 5-37 5.8 Exit menu .................................................................................... 5-40 Chapter 6: RAID Conï¬Âguration 6.1 Setting up RAID ............................................................................ 6-2 6.1.1 RAID deï¬Ânitions .............................................................. 6-2 6.1.2 Installing hard disk drives ................................................ 6-3 6.1.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS ........................................ 6-3 6.1.4 RAID conï¬Âguration utilities .............................................. 6-4 6.2 LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Setup Utility .......................... 6-5 6.2.1 Creating a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set .................................... 6-6 6.2.2 Creating a RAID 10 set ..................................................6-1 1 6.2.3 Adding or viewing a RAID conï¬Âguration ....................... 6-15 6.2.4 Initializing the logical drives .......................................... 6-18 6.2.5 Rebuilding failed drives ................................................. 6-23 6.2.6 Checking the drives for data consistency ..................... 6-25
vi Contents 6.2.7 Deleting a RAID conï¬Âguration ....................................... 6-28 6.2.8 Selecting the boot drive from a RAID set ...................... 6-29 6.2.9 Enabling the WriteCache .............................................. 6-30 6.3 Global Array Manager ................................................................ 6-30 6.4 Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility! (P5MT -S model only) ........... 6-31 6.4.1 Conï¬Âguring the SCSI controller .................................... 6-32 6.4.2 Enabling the HostRAID controller ................................. 6-3 3 6.4.3 Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) ...................................... 6-3 4 6.4.4 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) ...................................... 6-37 6.4.5 Creating a RAID 10 set (Stripe Mirror) ......................... 6-41 6.4.6 Adding a spare drive to a RAID 10 set .......................... 6-45 6.4.7 Deleting a RAID 10 set spare drive ............................... 6-4 6 6.4.8 Deleting a RAID set ...................................................... 6-48 6.4.9 Rebuilding a RAID set ................................................... 6-49 6.4.10 V erifying a RAID set hard disk drive ............................. 6-50 6.4.1 1 Making a RAID set bootable ......................................... 6-51 Chapter 7: Driver installation 7.1 RAID driver installation ............................................................... 7-2 7.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk ............................................ 7-2 7.1.2 Installing the RAID controller driver ................................ 7-3 7.2 LAN driver installation ............................................................... 7-12 7.2.1 Windows î 2000/2003 Server ........................................ 7-12 7.2.2 Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 ......................................... 7-13 7.3 VGA driver installation .............................................................. 7-14 7.3.1 Windows î 2000 Server ................................................. 7-14 7.3.2 Windows î 2003 Server ................................................. 7-15 7.3.3 Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 ......................................... 7-15 7.4 Management applications and utilities installation ................ 7-16 7.4.1 Running the support CD ............................................... 7-16 7.4.2 Drivers menu ................................................................. 7-16 7.4.3 Management Software menu ........................................ 7-17 7.4.4 Utilities menu ................................................................ 7-17 7.4.5 Contact information ....................................................... 7-17 Appendix: Reference information A.1 450 W single power supply ......................................................... A-2 A.1.1 General description ......................................................... A-2 A.1.2 Speciï¬Âcations .................................................................. A-3 A.2 Simple ï¬Âxes .................................................................................. A-4
vii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturer üs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. W ARNING! The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiï¬Âcations to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user üs authority to operate this equipment. Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Th is cla ss B di git al app ar at us com pli es w ith Ca nad ia n ICE S-0 03.
viii Safety information Electrical Safety ⢠Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power cables for the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged. ⢠T o prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to ï¬Âx it by yourself. Contact a qualiï¬Âed service technician or your dealer . Operation Safety ⢠Any mechanical operation on this server must be conducted by certiï¬Âed or experienced engineers. ⢠Before operating the server , carefully read all the manuals included with the server package. ⢠Before using the server , make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If any damage is detected, contact your dealer as soon as possible. ⢠T o avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry . ⢠A void dust, humidity , and temperature extremes. Place the server on a stable surface. This product is equipped with a three-wire power cable and plug for the user üs safety . Use the power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock. Lithium-Ion Battery W arning CAUTION! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer . Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer üs instructions. CD-ROM Drive Safety W arning CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Heavy System CAUTION! This server system is heavy . Ask for assistance when moving or carrying the system.
ix About this guide Audience This user guide is intended for system integrators and experienced users with at least basic knowledge of conï¬Âguring a server . Contents This guide contains the following parts: 1. Chapter 1: Product Introduction This chapter describes the general features of the server , including sections on front panel and rear panel speciï¬Âcations. 2. Chapter 2: Hardware setup This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing or removing system components. 3. Chapter 3: Installation options This chapter describes how to install optional components into the barebone server . 4. Chapter 4: Motherboard information This chapter gives information about the motherboard that comes with the server . This chapter includes the motherboard layout, jumper settings, and connector locations. 5. Chapter 5: BIOS information This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus and describes the BIOS parameters. 6. Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration This chapter provides information on how toconï¬Âgure your hard disk drives as RAID sets. 7. Chapter 7: Driver installation This chapter provides information on how to create a RAID set and how to install the drivers for system components. This chapter also describes the software applications that the barebone server supports. 8. Appendix: Reference information This section provides information about the power supply unit and a troubleshooting guide for solving common problems when using the barebone server .
x Reference Visit the ASUS websites worldwide that provide updated information for all ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information for details. W ARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. IMPORT ANT : Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task. NOTE: T ips and information to aid in completing a task. Conventions T o make sure that you perform certain tasks properly , take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual.
1- ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 This chapter describes the general features of the barebone server , including sections on the front panel and rear panel speciï¬Âcations. Chapter 1 Product introduction
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-2 1.1 System package contents Check your ASUS TS300-E3 package with the items on the following table. The package contents vary for the following conï¬Âgurations: ⢠P A4 (four hot-swap Serial A T A hard disk drives) ⢠PS4 (four hot-swap SCSI hard disk drives) Conï¬Âguration Item description P A4 PS4 ASUS TS300-E3 5U rackmount chassis with: ⢠ASUS P5MT motherboard ⢠ASUS P5MT -S motherboard ⢠450 W single power supply ⢠SA T A backplane board ⢠SCSI backplane board ⢠Floppy disk drive ⢠9 cm Blower ⢠12 cm Chassis fan ⢠Hot-swap HDD trays (including HDD screws) 4 4 ⢠Chassis roller wheels 4 4 ⢠Front I/O board ⢠Dummy covers Cables ⢠AC power cable ⢠SA T A signal cables ⢠SCSI signal cables ⢠SMBus cable System screws and cables System keys ( 2 pcs.) Bundled CDs ⢠TS300-E3 support CD with ASWM* ⢠Computer Associates î eT rust ⢠anti-virus CD Documentation ⢠ASUS TS300-E3 user guide ⢠ASUS ASWM 2.0 user guide Optional items ⢠52x IDE CD-ROM or 16X DVD-ROM drive ⢠ASUS TS300-E3 rackmount rail kit *ASUS System Web-based Management
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 1-3 1.2 System speciï¬Âcations The ASUS TS300-E3 is a barebone server system featuring the ASUS P5MT Series motherboard. The server supports an Intel î Pentium î 4/Pentium î D processor in the 775-land package, and includes the latest technologies through the chipsets embedded on the motherboard. (continued on the next page) Chassis Pedestal or rackmount 5U with removable front door bezel and chassis foot stand or roller-wheels. Motherboard ASUS P5MT (P A4 model) ASUS P5MT -S (PS4 model) A TX compatible form factor: 12 in x 9.6 in Chipset Northbridge: Intel î E7230 Memory Controller Hub (MCH) Southbridge: Intel î ICH7R I/O Bridge: Intel î 6702 PXH Processor Intel î Pentium î 4/Intel î Pentium î D processor in the 775-land pack age wi th Exte nded M emory 6 4-bit T echn olog y (EM6 4T) Supports Dual Core technology Front Side Bus 1066/800/533 MHz Memory Dual-channel memory architecture 4 x 240-pin DIMM sockets support ECC/non-ECC unbuffered 667/533 MHz DDR2 memory modules Supports 256 MB up to 8 GB of system memory LAN Dual Broadcom î BCM5721 G ig a bi t L AN co n tr o ll ers - PCI Express 1.0a speciï¬Âcations compliant Storage For P A4 model only Intel î ICH7R Southbridge supports: - 4 x Serial A T A 3 Gb/s hard disk drives - RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and RAID 5 (with limited OS support) conï¬Âguration - Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology - LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID controller (RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10) For PS4 model only Adaptec AIC-7901 SCSI controller supports: - 1 x Ultra 320 SCSI channel with RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 10 conï¬Âguration - Zero-Channel RAID (optional)
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-4 1.2 System speciï¬Âcations * Only PS4 model supports Zero Channel RAID (ZCR). ** If you install a PCI Express VGA card, the link speed downgrades to x1 due to chipset limitation. This limitation applies only to VGA cards. Expansion slots 1 x PCI 33 MHz/32-bit/5V (PCI 2.3) 1 x PCI-X 100 MHz/64-bit slot (PCI-X 1.0) 1 x PCI-X 100 MHz/64-bit slot (supports ZCR, PCI-X 1.0)* (colored green on PS4 model) 1 x PCI Express⢠x16 slot (x8 Link)** 1 x Mini-PCI socket for the ASUS Server Management Board Drive bays 1 x 3.25-inch FDD bay 3 x 5.25-inch drive bays Front panel 2 x USB 2.0 ports Rear panel 1 x Serial port 1 x Parallel port 1 x PS/2 keyboard port 1 x PS/2 mouse port 2 x LAN (RJ-45) ports 2 x USB 2.0 ports 1 x VGA port Management ASUS Server Web-based Management (ASWM) 2.0 ASUS Server Monitoring Agent (ASMA) Hardware monitors V oltage, temperature, CPU and memory utilization, storage capacity , and fan speed monitoring Automatic Server Restart (ASR) feature Power supply 450 W single power supply (with 24-pin and 4-pin power plugs)
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 1-5 1.3 Front panel features The TS300-E3 chassis displays a stylish front bezel with lock. The bezel covers the system components on the front panel and serves as security . Open the bezel to access the front panel components. The drive bays, power and reset buttons, LED indicators, CD-ROM drive, ï¬Âoppy drive, and USB 2.0 ports are located on the front panel. For future installation of 5.25-inch devices, two drive bays are available. CD-ROM drive Empty 5.25-inch bays Power button Reset button Message LED HDD access LED Power LED Floppy disk drive Security lock Drive bays USB 2.0 ports
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-6 1.4 Rear panel features The rear panel includes a slot for the motherboard rear I/O ports, expansion slots, a chassis lock and intrusion switch, a vent for the system fan, and power supply module. 12 cm system fan Chassis intrusion switch Expansion slots Gigabit LAN ports Po wer supp ly mo dule PS/2 mouse port PS/2 keyboard port USB 2.0 ports Serial port VGA port Parallel port Po wer connector
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 1-7 1.5 Internal features The barebone server system includes the basic components as shown. The photo below shows the TS300-E3 with the hard disk drive blower installed. The HDD blower circulates cool air within the system. 1 1. Power supply unit 2. Chassis fan 3. ASUS P5MT motherboard 4. Chassis intrusion switch 5. Expansion card locks 6. Optical drive 7. 2 x 5.25-inch drive bays 8. HDD blower (HDD drive cage inside) 9. Front I/0 board 10. SA T A backplane P A4 (4 hot-swap SA T A conï¬Âguration) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠â¢
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-8 1 1. Power supply unit 2. Chassis fan 3. ASUS P5MT -S motherboard 4. Chassis intrusion switch 5. Expansion card locks 6. Optical drive 7. 2 x 5.25-inch drive bays 8. HDD blower (HDD drive cage inside) 9. Front I/0 board 10. SCSI backplane PS4 (4 hot-swap SCSI conï¬Âguration) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠â¢
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 1-9 1.6 LED information The barebone system comes with ï¬Âve LED indicators. Refer to the following table for the LED status description. System and HDD LED *SCSI Access Fault-T olerant Enclosure (on PS4 model only) ! Power LED (blue) HDD Access LED (green) Message LED (red) Driv e Status LED (g reen/re d) Drive Activity LED (green) The Power , HDD Access, and Message LEDs are visible even if the system front bezel is closed. LED Icon Display status Description System Power LED ON Blinking System power ON System is in suspend mode HDD Access LED OFF Blinking No activity Read/write data into the HDD Message LED OFF Blinking System is normal; no incoming event ASMS indicates a HW monitor event Hard disk drives Drive Status LED Green Red Green/Red - Blinking Bridge board connected to backplane Installed HDD is in good condition HDD failure HDD rebuilding using the RAID card SAF-TE* function Drive Activity LED Blinking Read/write data into the HDD
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-10
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2- This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing or removing system components. Chapter 2 Hardware setup
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-2 2.1 Chassis cover The chassis features a âÂÂscrewless designâ that allows convenient assembly and disassembly . Y ou can simply push or slide mechanical bolts and locks to remove the cover . 2.1.1 Removing the side cover 1. Remove the two screws that secure the cover to the chassis. 2. Slide the side cover for about half an inch toward the rear until it is disengaged from the chassis. 3. Carefully lift the cover and set it aside. Viewing the internal structure Without the side cover , the internal structure and installed components of the barebone server vary depending on the model you purchased. Refer to section âÂÂ1.5 Internal featuresâ for the different model conï¬Âgurations. Perform the procedures in the succeeding sections to install the CPU, system memory , disk drives, and expansion cards; replace fans and power supply; and connect the system cables. 1 1 2
2-3 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.1.2 Reinstalling the side cover T o reinstall the side cover: 1. Match and insert the upper hooks and lower sliding edge of the cover to the corresponding chassis holes and edge. 2. Slide the cover toward the front until it snaps in place. Y ou may need to remove some of the installed components to access the DIMM sockets and internal connectors. Refer to section âÂÂ2.10 Removable componentsâ for instructions. 3. Drive in the two screws you removed earlier to secure the side cover . 2 3 3
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-4 2.2 Motherboard overview The barebone server comes with the P5MT (P A4 model) or P5MT -S (PS4 model) motherboard already installed. The motherboard is secured to the chassis by nine (9) screws as indicated by the circles in the illustration below . Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing any motherboard component or connection. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. LAN2 î Place this side towards the rear of the chassis Refer to âÂÂChapter 4 Motherboard informationâ for detailed information on the motherboard.
2-5 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.3.1 Installing the CPU T o install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel î Pentium î 4 processor in the 775-land package Before installing the CPU, make sure that the socket box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. LAN2 î P5MT Series CPU Socket 775 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. Retention tab Load lever This side of the socket box should face you. PnP cap A B T o prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-6 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135ú angle. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and foreï¬Ânger to a 100ú angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket. The socket alignment key should ï¬Ât into the CPU notch. Alignment key Gold triangle mark Load plate A B
2-7 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 The CPU ï¬Âts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. A B The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with the Intel î Enhanced Memory 64 T echnology (EM64T), Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST), and Hyper-Threading T echnology . Refer to the Appendix for more information on these CPU features.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-8 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and airduct assembly The TS300-E3 comes with a proprietary CPU heatsink and airduct, which come in separate boxes when you receive the package. Y ou have to assemble the CPU heatsink and airduct before installing to the motherboard. T o assemble the CPU heatsink and airduct: 1. Align the airduct pegs to the fan and heatsink holes. 2. Push down the airduct into the holes to secure the assembly . T o install the CPU heatsink and airduct assembly: 1. Locate the four screw holes on the motherboard.
2-9 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2. Position the CPU heatsink and airduct assembly on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the heatsink screws match the screw holes on the motherboard. 3. Drive the four screws into the holes in a diagonal sequence to secure the heatsink and airduct assembly to the motherboard. A A B B 2 3 3 3 3 4. Connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_F AN1. Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug the connector . LAN2 î P5MT Series CPU fan connector CPU_F AN1 CPU_FAN1 GND F ANPWR PWM ROT AT IO N
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-10 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate II (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets to support 240-pin DDR modules. The ï¬Âgure illustrates the location of the DDR DIMM sockets: 2.4.2 Memory conï¬Âgurations Y ou may install 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, and 2 GB unbuffered ECC or non-ECC DDR2-533/667 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency . For optimum compatibility , it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor . Refer to the DDR2 Qualiï¬Âed V endors List at the ASUS web site. ⢠When installing one or two DIMMs, install the DIMM(s) to the blue slots (DIMM_A2/DIMM_B2). ⢠Three DDR DIMMs intalled into any three memory sockets will function in single-channel mode. LAN2 î P5MT Series 240-pin DDR2 DIMM sockets DIMM_A1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_A2 1 12 Pins 128 Pins
2-1 1 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. T o install a DIMM: 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM T o remove a DIMM: 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it ï¬Âts in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. DO not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Unlocked retaining clip DDR2 DIMM notch 3 2 1 Support the DIMM lightly with your ï¬Ângers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it ï¬Âips out with extra force. 1 2 1 DDR2 DIMM notch
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-12 Before you can install a 5.25-inch drive, you should ï¬Ârst remove the front panel assembly (front bezel and front panel cover). The front panel assembly is attached to the chassis through three hooked tabs on the left side and four hinge-like tabs on the right side. T o remove the front panel assembly: 1. Locate the four hooked tabs on the chassis side rail. 2. Press each lock tab to release the front panel from the chassis. 2.5 Front panel assembly 2.5.1 Removing the front panel assembly 3. Pull and swing the left edge of the front panel outward.
2-13 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 Do not use too much force when removing the front panel assembly . 4. Unhook the hinge-like tabs from the holes on the right side of the front panel to completely detach the front panel assembly from the chassis. Hinge-like tab
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-14 2.5.2 Reinstalling the front panel assembly T o reinstall the front panel assembly (front bezel and front panel cover): 1. Insert the four hinge-like tabs to the holes on the right edge of the chassis. 2. Swing the front panel to the left and ï¬Ât the four (4) hooked tabs to the left side of the chassis until the tabs snap back in place. Hinge-like tab 1 1 1 1 2
2-15 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.6 5.25-inch drives Three 5.25-inch drive bays are located on the upper front part of the chassis. A CD-ROM drive that comes standard with the system package occupies the uppermost bay (labeled 1). The two lower bays (labeled 2 and 3) are available for additional 5.25-inch devices. If you have previously used and powered up the system, and that it may be connected to an AC power source, make sure to unplug the power cable before installing or removing any system components. Failure to do so may cause damage to the motherboard and other system components! T o install a 5.25-inch drive: 1. Use a Phillips (cross) screwdriver to remove the screws that secure the metal cover of the bay where you want to install the drive. 2. Insert the optical drive into the 5.25-inch drive bay . 1 2 3
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-16 5. Connect the IDE cable to the IDE connector on the back of the drive. 6. Connect a 4-pin plug from the power supply to the power connector on the back of the drive. IDE cable Power plug 3. Make sure that the drive and bay hole align as shown. When in place, the drive protrudes about an inch from the front panel. 4. Secure the drive with a screw .
2-17 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7. On the front panel assembly , detach the plastic bay cover opposite the 5.25-inch drive that you installed by pressing the two hooked tabs on each side of the bay cover . 8. Reinstall the front panel assembly when done. Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.2 Reinstalling the front panel assemblyâ for instructions.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-18 2.7 Hard disk drives 2.7.1 Installing a hot-swap SA T A/SCSI HDD Follow the instructions in this section to install a hot-swap SA T A (P A4 model) or SCSI (PS4 model) hard disk drive (HDD). 1. Open the front bezel to access the hot-swap drive trays. 2. Release a drive tray by pushing the spring lock to the right, then pulling the tray lever outward. The drive tray ejects slightly after you pull out the lever . 3. Firmly hold the tray lever and pull the drive tray out of the bay . 4. An empty drive tray requires a metal bracket for support. Use a Phillips (cross) screwdriver to remove the bracket when you are ready to install a hard disk in the drive tray . Metal bracket T ray lever Spring lock
2-19 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5. Place a SA T A or an SCA SCSI hard disk to the drive tray , and secure it with four screws. 6. Carefully insert drive tray and push it all the way to the depth of the bay until just a small fraction of the tray edge protrudes. 7. Push the tray lever until it clicks, and secures the drive tray in place. The drive tray is correctly placed when its front edge aligns with the bay edge.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-20 2. Press the dummy cover into the slot opening until the hook tab clicks in place. 3. When installed, the dummy cover appears as shown. 2.7.2 Installing an HDD dummy cover The HDD dummy covers come pre-installed on the front panel bezel. In case you removed the covers, follow these steps to re-install them. T o install an HDD dummy cover: 1. From the inside of the front panel assembly , insert the ï¬Âat end of a dummy cover into the slot as shown. The end with the hook tab should be close to the front panel LEDs. Flat end Hook tab
2-21 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.8 Expansion cards Refer to this section when installing expansion cards. 2.8.1 Installing an expansion card T o install an expansion card: 1. Lay the chassis on its side. 2. Locate the metal bracket opposite the slot you want to use. Remove the screw that secures the metal bracket to the chassis. Set aside the metal bracket for future use. 3. Align the card golden ï¬Ângers to the slot and its metal bracket to the slot opening on the chassis. 4. Press the card ï¬Ârmly until it is properly seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the bracket screw you removed earlier . Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause physical injury , and damage to the card and motheboard components!
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-22 2.8.2 Removing an expansion card T o remove an expansion card: 1. Remove the screw that secures the card to the chassis. 2. Carefully remove the card from the slot. 3. Reinstall the metal bracket and secure it to the chassis with the screw that you removed earlier .
2-23 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.9 Cable connections ⢠The bundled system cables are pre-connected before shipment. Y ou do not need to disconnect these cables unless you will remove pre-installed components to install additional devices. ⢠Refer to Chapter 4 for detailed information on the connectors. Standard cables connected to the motherboard 7. SMBus connector 8. Auxiliary panel cable 9. Front USB cable 10. Front panel cable 1 1. Floppy disk drive 12. Primary IDE cable 13. SCSI connector (for PS4 Model only) 1. 24-pin A TX power 2. 4-pin 12V power 3. CPU fan 1/2 4. Rear fan 1/2 5. Front fan 1/2 6. Serial A T A connectors P5MT -S 8Mbit Flash BIOS Super I/O PRI_IDE1 25cm (9.8in) 30.5cm (12in) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) SAT A1 A TI RAGE XL VGA Controller AUX_PANEL1 KBPWR1 PSUSMB1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: Keyboard LAN1 LAN2 î USB12 COM1 P ARALLEL PORT VGA1 USBPW12 REAR_FAN1 ATX12V1 FM_CPU2 CPU_FAN2 FM_CPU1 CPU_FAN1 PCIE1 PCIX3 PCIX2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 SCSIA1 SAT A2 SAT A3 SAT A4 PANEL1 RECOVERY1 USB34 USBPW34 HDLED1 BUZZ1 FLOPPY1 BMCCONN1 TRPWR1 CLRTC1 BPSMB1 VGA_EN1 SB_PWR1 COM2 LAN_EN2 LAN_EN1 Broadcom BCM5721 Broadcom BCM5721 Adaptec AIC-7901 Intel E7230 Intel 6702 PXH Intel ICH7R BMCSOCKET1 LAN2 LGA775 PCI4 SCSI_EN1 A TXPWR1 REAR_FAN2 1 6 10 9 5 3 8 5 2 3 4 2.9.1 Motherboard connections 11 12 13 7
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-24 2.9.2 SA T A backplane connections (in P A4 model only) A SA T A backplane comes pre-installed in the TS300-E3 P A4 model. The SA T A backplane has four 15-pin SA T A connectors to support Serial A T A hard disk drives. The backplane design incorporates a hot swap feature to allow easy connection or removal of SA T A hard disks. The LED on the backplane connect to the front panel LED to indicate HDD status. See section âÂÂ1.6 LED informationâ for details. Front side The front side of the SA T A backplane faces the front panel when installed. This side includes four SA T A connectors for the hot swap drive trays. Drive status LEDs CON1 CON3 CON5 CON7 Each SA T A connector is labeled (CON1, CON3, CON5, CON7) so you can easily determine their counterpart connectors at the back side of the backplane. Refer to the table for reference. HDD device Front side connector Back side connector HDD 1 CON1 CON2 HDD 2 CON3 CON4 HDD 3 CON5 CON6 HDD 4 CON7 CON8
2-25 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 Back side The back side of SA T A backplane faces the rear panel when installed. This side includes the power connectors, SA T A interfaces for the motherboard Serial A T A connectors or the SA T A/RAID card, an HDD fan connector , and SMBus connectors. Fan connector (for HDD fan) P o we r c on n e c t o r s (connect power plugs from the power supply) The back side SA T A connectors are attached to the motherboard SA T A connectors via the supplied SA T A cables. Refer to the illustration below for the location of the SA T A connectors. Refer to the table on the right for the default SA T A cable connections. CON2 CON4 CON6 CON8 Upper 6-1 pins: SMBus connector (connects the SMB cable from the BPSMB1 connector on the motherboard) SA T A2 S A T A R A I D c o n t r o l l e r P5MT 8Mbit Flash BIOS Super I/O PRI_IDE1 25cm (9.8in) 30.5cm (12in) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) SATA1 ATI RAGE XL VGA Controller AUX_PANEL1 KBPWR1 PS/2KBMS T: Mouse B: Keyboard LAN1 LAN2 î USB12 COM1 PARALLEL PORT VGA1 PCIE1 PCIX3 PCIX2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 SATA2 SATA3 SATA4 PANEL1 RECOVERY1 USB34 USBPW34 HDLED1 BUZZ1 FLOPPY1 BMCCONN1 TRPWR1 BPSMB1 VGA_EN1 SB_PWR1 COM2 LAN_EN2 LAN_EN1 Broadcom BCM5721 Broadcom BCM5721 Intel E7230 Intel 6702 PXH Intel ICH7R BMCSOCKET1 LAN2 LGA775 PCI4 PSUSMB1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power USBPW12 REAR_FAN1 ATX12V1 FM_CPU2 CPU_FAN2 FM_CPU1 CPU_FAN1 CLRTC1 ATXPWR1 REAR_FAN2 RAID_SEL1 SA T A4 SA T A1 SA T A3 Backplane ID Connected to (on motherboard) Controlled by CON2 SA T A1 Intel î ICH7R CON4 SA T A2 Intel î ICH7R CON6 SA T A3 Intel î ICH7R CON8 SA T A4 Intel î ICH7R
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-26 SA T A backplane jumper settings and HDD ID assignments The 6-pin jumper J3 allows you to deï¬Âne your desired SA T A conï¬Âguration. The picture below shows the location of jumper J3 with pins 1-3 and 2-4 shorted. Refer to the table for the jumper settings and the appropriate ID# for each SA T A HDD bay . J3 setting (1-3 shorted, 2-4 shorted) Device SA T A ID# Drive Bay 1 ID0 Drive Bay 2 ID1 Drive Bay 3 ID2 Drive Bay 4 ID3
2-27 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.9.3 SCSI backplane connections (in PS4 model only) A SCSI backplane comes pre-installed in the TS300-E3 PS4 model. The SCSI backplane has four 68-pin SCSI connectors to support SCA SCSI hard disks. The backplane design incorporates a hot swap feature to allow easy connection or removal of SCSI hard disks. The LEDs on the backplane connect to the front panel LEDs to indicate HDD access, HDD failure, thermal failure, or fan failure. See section âÂÂ1.6 LED information.â Front side The front side of the SCSI backplane faces the front panel when installed. This side includes four SCSI connectors for the hot swap drive trays. HDD status LEDs HDD activity LEDs Disk drive 1 Disk drive 2 Disk drive 3 Disk drive 4
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-28 Back side The back side of SCSI backplane faces the rear panel when installed. This side includes the power connectors, SCSI interfaces for the motherboard SCSI connector or the SCSI/RAID card and terminator , an HDD fan connector , and SMBus connectors. ⢠the upper SCSI interface of the backplane connects to the motherboard SCSI connector or the SCSI/RAID card ⢠a SCSI multi-mode terminator (L VD/SE) is connected to the lower SCSI interface of the backplane 68-pin SCSI connector (connects the SCSI cable from the motherboard SCSI connector or the SCSI/RAID card) SMBus connector [SMB_IN1] (connects the SMB cable from the motherboard) Fan connector (for HDD fan) P o we r c on n e c t o r s (connect power plugs from the power supply) 68-pin SCSI connector (with SCSI multi-mode terminator)
2-29 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 Refer to the following tables for the jumper settings and the appropriate ID# for each SCSI HDD bay . SCSI backplane jumper settings and HDD ID assignments The 6-pin jumper J1 on each of the SCSI backplanes allows you to deï¬Âne your desired SCSI conï¬Âguration. The picture below shows the location of jumper J1 with pins 1-3 and 2-4 shorted. J1 setting (1-3 shorted, 2-4 shorted) Device SCSI ID# Drive Bay 1 ID0 Drive Bay 2 ID1 Drive Bay 3 ID2 Drive Bay 4 ID3 GEM SAF-TE ID15 (SCSI channel-0)
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-30 2.10.1 Chassis fan T o remove the chassis fan: 1. Unplug the chassis fan cable fron the REAR_F AN1 connector on the motherboard. 2.10 Removable components Y ou may need to remove previously installed system components when installing or removing system devices, or when you need to replace defective components. This section tells how to remove the following components: 2. Locate the four screws that secure the fan to the chassis. 3. Remove the four screws while carefully supporting the chassis fan with your free hand to prevent it from falling off. Set the screws aside. 4. Carefully remove the chassis fan. 1. Chassis fan 2. HDD blowers 3. SA T A/SCSI backplanes 4. Floppy disk drive module 5. Front I/O board 6. Chassis footpads and roller wheels 7. Power supply unit
2-31 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2. Align the chassis fan holes to the screw holes on the chassis. 3. Drive in the four screws you removed earlier to secure the fan to the chassis. 5. Remove the four screws that secure the metal shroud to the fan. Set the screws aside. T o reinstall the chassis fan: 1. Drive in the four screws you removed earlier into the fan screw holes to secure the metal shroud to the fan.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-32 2.10.2 HDD blower T o remove the HDD blower: 1. Remove the side cover . Refer to section âÂÂ2.1.1 Removing the side coverâ for instructions. 2. Disconnect the 3-pin fan cable from the fan connector on the backplane. 3 4. Firmly grip the blower case as shown, then slide it out of the chassis in the direction of the arrow until the tabs are released from the holes of the HDD cage. 3. Loosen the thumb screw that secures the HDD blower case to the chassis. 4. Plug the chassis fan cable to the connector on the motherboard.
2-33 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6. Remove the blower from the case. T o reinstall the HDD blower: 1. Replace the blower into the case. 2. Secure the blower to the case with the two screws you removed earlier . 5. Remove the two screws on the blower case using a Phillips screwdriver . Set the screws aside.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-34 4. Drive in the thumb screw to secure the HDD blower case. 5. Connect the 3-pin fan cable to the fan connector on the backplane. 3. Slide in the blower case as shown, making sure the tabs ï¬Ât into the holes on the HDD cage.
2-35 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.10.3 SA T A/SCSI backplane T o remove the SA T A/SCSI backplane: 1. Remove the HDD blower case. Refer to section âÂÂ2.10.2 HDD blowersâ for instructions. 2. Disconnect all cables from the SA T A/SCSI backplane. When disconnecting a cable, hold and ï¬Ârmly pull the cable plug. DO NOT pull the cable itself. Doing so may damage the cable! 3. From the inner edge, push the backplane outward so that the outer edge protrudes slightly from the slot. 4. From the outer edge, ï¬Ârmly hold the backplane and carefully slide it out.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-36 T o reinstall a SA T A/SCSI backplane: 1. Position the backplane into its slot with the component side facing the rear panel, and the power connectors on top. 2. Align the backplane with the rail- like dents on the slot to ensure that it ï¬Âts securely . 3. Slide the backplane into the slot until it ï¬Âts. If correctly installed, the outer edge of the backplane aligns with the corner of the drive cage. 4. Connect the appropriate cables to the backplane. Refer to sections âÂÂ2.9.2 SA T A backplane connectionsâ and âÂÂ2.9.3 SCSI backplane connectionsâ for details. Rail-like dents
2-37 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.10.4 Floppy disk drive 2. Carefully pull out the drive from the chassis until you see the cables connected to the drive. T o remove the ï¬Âoppy disk drive: 1. Remove the screw that secures the drive to the chassis. Y ou need to remove the front panel assembly before you can remove the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.1 Removing the front panel assemblyâ for instructions. 3. Disconnect the ï¬Âoppy disk cable and power cable from the drive to completely release the drive.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-38 T o install a ï¬Âoppy disk drive: 1. Position the ï¬Âoppy drive vertically with the eject button on the left side (close to the HDDs). 2. Connect the drive signal cable and power cable. 4. Secure the drive cage with a screw . 3. Carefully push the drive into the bay until the drive cage ï¬Âts the front edge of the bay . Floppy drive power cable Floppy drive signal cable Red stripe to match Pin 1 on the connector
2-39 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.10.5 Front I/O board Y ou need to remove the front panel assembly before you can remove the front I/O board. Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.1 Removing the front panel assemblyâ for instructions. T o remove the front I/O board: 1. Remove the screw that secures the front I/O board bracket to the front panel. 4. Remove the screw that secures the I/O board to the bracket. 2. Carefully pull out the bracket until you see the cables connected to the I/O board. 3. Disconnect all the cables from the I/O board.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-40 T o install the front I/O board: 1. Place the I/O board in the bracket, component side up. Secure the front I/O board to the bracket with a screw . 2. Position the I/O board into the bay with the component side to the left (close to the HDDs). Connect the I/O cables to the connectors on the back of the I/O board. 3. Insert the I/O board into the bay until the bracket ï¬Âts the front edge of the bay . 4. Secure the I/O board bracket with a screw . USB 2.0 connector
2-41 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.10.6 Chassis footpads and roller wheels The barebone server system is shipped with four footpads attached to the bottom of the chassis for stability . Y ou need to remove these footpads if: ⢠if you want to replace the footpads with the bundled roller wheels ⢠you wish to install the system to a rack (Refer to âÂÂChapter 3 Installation optionsâ of this user guide, and to the âÂÂRackmount Kitâ user guide for instructions) T o remove the footpads: 1. Lay the system chassis on its side. 2. Use a ï¬Âat screwdriver to ï¬Âip out the top layer of a footpad. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to remove the other three footpads. 3. Remove the footpad by rotating it counterclockwise.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-42 T o remove the chassis wheels: 1. Lay the system chassis on its side. 2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws that secure the wheels to the bottom of the chassis. 3. Repeat step 2 to remove the other three roller wheels. Remove the chassis roller wheels if you wish to mount the system to a rack. For convenient transport, install the roller wheels the came with the system package. Each wheel has a brake lock to stabilize the chassis in place. T o install the chassis wheels: 1. Lay the chassis in its side. 2. Locate the designated screw holes for each of the four wheel sets. T ake note of the numbers alongside each hole when placing screws. 3. Secure each wheel to the bottom of the chassis using four screws. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to install the other three wheels. 3 1 2 4
2-43 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.10.7 Power supply unit Refer to this section when removing or installing a power supply unit to the barebone system. Y ou MUST disconnect all power cable plugs from the motherboard and other installed devices before removing the power supply unit. The picture below shows the motherboard and device connectors where the power plugs are connected. Refer to the Appendix at the end of this document for the power supply speciï¬Âcations. 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 Model P A4 1. 24-pin A TX (motherboard power connector) 2. 4-pin 12V (motherboard power connector , hidden behind the cables) 3. 4-pin plug (optical drive) 4. 2 x 4-pin plugs (SA T A backplane) 5. 4-pin plug (ï¬Âoppy disk drive, hidden behind the backplane) Model PS4 1. 24-pin A TX (motherboard power connector) 2. 4-pin 12V (motherboard power connector , hidden behind the cables) 3. 4-pin plug (optical drive) 4. 2 x 4-pin plugs (SCSI backplane) 5. 4-pin plug (ï¬Âoppy disk drive, hidden behind the backplane) 4 5 5 Make sure to unplug ALL power cables from the system devices before removing the power supply unit.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-44 T o remove the power supply unit (PSU): 1. Remove the chassis cover . Refer to section âÂÂ2.1.1 Removing the side cover .â 2. Remove the front panel assembly . Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.1 Removing the front panel assembly . 3. Lay the chassis on a ï¬Âat, stable surface. 4. Locate the four screws on the rear panel. Remove the screws and set them aside. 5. Locate and remove the screws that secure the PSU bracket to the chassis. 6. Slide the bracket in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the chassis.
2-45 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7. Carefully slide the PSU in the direction of the arrow until it disengages from the chassis. T o reinstall the power supply unit: 1. Carefully slide the PSU in the direction of the arrow . 2. Secure the PSU to the chassis with the four screws you removed earlier .
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-46 3. Slide in the PSU bracket. 4. Align the screw holes. 5. Secure the bracket with screws you removed earlier .
3- ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 Chapter 3 Installation option This chapter describes how to install optional components into the barebone server .
Chapter 3: Installation option 3-2 The items required for the optional conï¬Âgurations described in this chapter are not included in the standard barebone system package. These items are purchased separately . Preparing the system for rack mounting Removing the footpads or roller wheels Refer to section âÂÂ2.10.6 Chassis footpads and roller wheelsâ for instructions on removing the footpads or roller wheels. Attaching the rack rails Refer to the installation guide that came with the Rackmount Rail Kit for instructions on how to attach the rails and on the barebone server system and the corresponding rails on the industrial rack. 4. Locate two round mylars on top cover . 5. Carefully remove each mylar using a sharp, ï¬Âat object such as the edge of a cutter . Removing the top cover T o remove the top cover: 1. Remove the chassis cover . Refer to section âÂÂ2.1.1 Removing the side cover .â 2. Remove the front panel assembly . Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.1 Removing the front panel assembly . 3. Carefully slide out the protruding portion of the top cover as shown. 3 We recommend that you allot at least 1U space above the server system to ensure optimal thermal performance.
3- ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 This chapter gives information about the motherboard that comes with the server . This chapter includes the motherboard layout, jumper settings, and connector locations. Chapter 4 Motherboard info
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-2 4.1 Motherboard layouts P5MT model P5MT 8Mbit Flash BIOS Super I/O PRI_IDE1 25cm (9.8in) 30.5cm (12in) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) SAT A1 A TI RAGE XL VGA Controller AUX_PANEL1 KBPWR1 PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: Keyboard LAN1 LAN2 î USB12 COM1 P ARALLEL PORT VGA1 PCIE1 PCIX3 PCIX2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 SAT A2 SAT A3 SAT A4 PANEL1 RECOVERY1 USB34 USBPW34 HDLED1 BUZZ1 FLOPPY1 BMCCONN1 TRPWR1 BPSMB1 VGA_EN1 SB_PWR1 COM2 LAN_EN2 LAN_EN1 Broadcom BCM5721 Broadcom BCM5721 Intel E7230 Intel 6702 PXH Intel ICH7R BMCSOCKET1 LAN2 LGA775 PCI4 PSUSMB1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power USBPW12 REAR_FAN1 ATX12V1 FM_CPU2 CPU_FAN2 FM_CPU1 CPU_FAN1 CLRTC1 A TXPWR1 REAR_FAN2 RAID_SEL1
4-3 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 P5MT -S model P5MT -S 8Mbit Flash BIOS Super I/O PRI_IDE1 25cm (9.8in) 30.5cm (12in) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) SAT A1 A TI RAGE XL VGA Controller AUX_PANEL1 KBPWR1 PSUSMB1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: Keyboard LAN1 LAN2 î USB12 COM1 P ARALLEL PORT VGA1 USBPW12 REAR_FAN1 ATX12V1 FM_CPU2 CPU_FAN2 FM_CPU1 CPU_FAN1 PCIE1 PCIX3 PCIX2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 SCSIA1 SAT A2 SAT A3 SAT A4 PANEL1 RECOVERY1 USB34 USBPW34 HDLED1 BUZZ1 FLOPPY1 BMCCONN1 TRPWR1 CLRTC1 BPSMB1 VGA_EN1 SB_PWR1 COM2 LAN_EN2 LAN_EN1 Broadcom BCM5721 Broadcom BCM5721 Adaptec AIC-7901 Intel E7230 Intel 6702 PXH Intel ICH7R BMCSOCKET1 LAN2 LGA775 PCI4 SCSI_EN1 A TXPWR1 REAR_FAN2
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-4 Layout contents Jumpers Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) 4-5 2. CPU fan pin selection (3-pin FM_CPU1, FM_CPU2) 4-6 3. USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34) 4-6 4. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) 4-7 5. VGA controller setting (3-pin VGA_EN1) 4-7 6. Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN_EN1; LAN_EN2) 4-8 7. RAID controller selection (3-pin RAID_SEL1) (P5MT model only) 4-8 8. SCSI controller setting (3-pin SCSI_EN1) (P5MT -S model only) 4-9 9. Force BIOS recovery setting (3-pin RECOVERY1) 4-9 Internal connectors Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) 4-10 2. Primary IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) 4-10 3. Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1, SA T A2, SA T A3, SA T A4) 4-1 1 4. Hard disk activity LED connector (4-pin HDLED1) 4-12 5. USB connector (10-1 pin USB34) 4-12 6. Ultra320 SCSI connectors (one 68-pin SCSIA1) (P5MT -S model only) 4-13 7. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) 4-14 8. BMC connector (16-pin BMCCONN1) 4-14 9. Ambient thermal sensor (2-pin TRPWR1) 4-14 10. CPU and system fan connectors (3-pin CPU_F AN1/2, REAR_F AN1/2, FRNT_F AN1/2) 4-15 1 1. Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) 4-15 12. Power supply SMBus connector (5-pin PSUSMB1) 4-16 13. A TX power connectors (24-pin A TXPWR1, 8-pin A TX12V2) 4-16 14. System panel connector (20-pin P ANEL1) 4-17 15. Auxiliary panel connector (20-pin AUX_P ANEL1) 4-18
4-5 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLR TC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! 4.2 Jumpers The grayed out components in the illustrations may not be present in certain models. 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) This jumper allows you to clear the Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. Y ou can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. T o erase the RTC RAM: 1. T urn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery . 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Re-install the battery . 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer . 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. LAN2 î P5MT Series Clear RTC RAM CLRTC1 Normal (Default) Clear CMOS 1 2 2 3
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-6 3. USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34) Set these jumpers to 5V to wake up the computer from S1 sleep mode (CPU stopped, DRAM refreshed, system running in low power mode) using the connected USB devices. Set to 5VSB to wake up from S4 sleep mode (no power to CPU, DRAM in slow refresh, power supply in reduced power mode). ⢠The USB device wake-up feature requires a power supply that can provide 500mA on the 5VSB lead for each USB port; otherwise, the system would not power up. ⢠If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 4 to wake up the system from S4 sleep mode. ⢠The total current consumed must NOT exceed the power supply capability ( 5VSB) whether under normal condition or in sleep mode. 2. CPU fan pin selection (3-pin FM_CPU1, FM_CPU2) These jumpers allow you to connect either a 3-pin or a 4-pin fan cable plug to the CPU fan connectors (CPU_F AN1, CPU_F AN2). Set these jumpers to pins 1-2 if you are using a 3-pin fan cable plug, or to pins 2-3 if you are using a 4-pin plug. LAN2 î P5MT Series FM CPU Setting FM_CPU2 FM_CPU1 1 2 2 3 3-pin fan 4-pin fan (Default) 2 3 2 1 3-pin fan 4-pin fan (Default) LAN2 î P5MT Series USB device wake-up USBPW12 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 3 1 2 USBPW34 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 3 1 2
4-7 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 4. Keyboard/Mouse power (3-pin KBPWR1) Thi s j umper allows you to ena ble or disab le the keyb oar d/mouse wake -up fea tur e. Set this jumpe r t o p ins 2- 3 ( 5V SB) to wake up the c ompute r when you pr ess any key on the key boa rd (th e defa ult is the Spa ce Bar ) or click the mouse. T his featu re req uires an AT X powe r supp ly tha t can su pply a t leas t 1A on the 5VSB lead, and a c orr espond ing se tting in th e B IOS. 5. VGA controller setting (3-pin VGA_EN1) These jumpers allow you to enable or disable the onboard A TI î RAGE-XL PCI VGA controller . Set to pins 1-2 to activate the VGA feature. LAN2 î P5MT Series Keyboard power setting KBPWR1 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 3 1 2 LAN2 î P5MT Series VGA setting VGA_EN1 Enable (Default) Disable 2 1 2 3
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-8 6. Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN_EN1, LAN_EN2) These jumpers allow you to enable or disable the onboard Broadcom î BCM5721 Gigabit LAN1 or LAN2 controller . Set to pins 1-2 to activate the Gigabit LAN controller . LAN2 î P5MT Series LAN_EN1 setting Enable (Default) Disable LAN_EN1 2 1 2 3 LAN2 î P5MT Series LAN_EN2 setting Enable (Default) Disable LAN_EN2 2 1 2 3 7. RAID controller selection (3-pin RAID_SEL1) [P5MT model only] T h is j um pe r al lo ws y ou t o s el ec t th e RA ID c on ï¬Âg ur at i o n ut il it y to u se w he n yo u c r ea te d is k ar ra ys . Pl ac e t he j um pe r ca ps o ve r pi ns 1 -2 i f yo u wa nt t o us e th e LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Setup Utility (default); otherwise, place the jumper caps to pins 2-3 to use the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager . LAN2 î RAID_SEL1 LSI RAID ROM (Default) INTEL RAID ROM 2 1 2 3 P5MT Series RAID_SEL1 setting
4-9 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 9. Force BIOS recovery setting (3-pin RECOVER Y1) This jumper allows you to quickly update or recover the BIOS settings when it becomes corrupted. T o update the BIOS: 1. Prepare a ï¬Âoppy disk that contains the latest BIOS for the motherboard (xxxx-xxx.ROM) and the AFUDOS.EXE utility . 2. Set the jumper to pins 2-3. 3. Insert the ï¬Âoppy disk then turn on the system to update the BIOS. 4. Shut down the system. 5. Set the jumper back to pins 1-2. 6. T urn on the system. 8. SCSI controller setting (3-pin SCSI_EN1) [P5MT -S model only] This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard Adaptec AIC-7901 PCI-X SCSI controller . Set to pins 1-2 to activate the SCSI feature, and support RAID conï¬Âgurations. LAN2 î P5MT Series SCSI_EN1 setting SCSI_EN1 Enable (Default) Disable 2 3 2 1 LAN2 î P5MT Series BIOS recovery setting RECOVERY1 (Default) Normal BIOS recovery 2 3 2 1
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-10 2. Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) Th is con nec to r is for an U lt ra ATA 100 /6 6/ 33 sig nal c ab le. Th e U lt ra AT A 1 00/ 66/ 33 s ign al cab le h as thr ee co nn ect ors : a b lu e c onn ect or f or the pr ima ry IDE c on nec tor on t he mo the rbo ar d, a bla ck co nn ect or for a n Ult ra ATA 10 0/6 6/3 3 I DE s lav e d evi ce ( opt ica l d ri ve /ha rd dis k dr ive ), and a g ray co nne ct or fo r a n U ltr a AT A 1 00/ 66/ 33 I DE mas ter d ev ice (h ard d is k d riv e). I f you in sta ll tw o h ard di sk d riv es, yo u mu st con ï¬Âgu re t he sec ond d ri ve as a s la ve de vic e by se tti ng it s jum per ac co rd ing ly. Re fe r to the ha rd d isk do cum en ta tio n f or th e ju mpe r s ett in gs . 4.3 Internal connectors 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) This connector is for the provided ï¬Âoppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector , then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. ⢠Pi n 2 0 o n t he I DE con nec tor is rem ove d to ma tch th e co ver ed hol e on th e U ltr a AT A c able co nne cto r. T his pr eve nts inc orr ect ins ert ion wh en y ou con nec t th e ID E c able . ⢠Us e t he 80- cond uct or IDE cab le for Ul tra ATA 10 0/6 6/33 ID E d evi ces. LAN2 î NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. P5MT Series Floppy disk drive connector FLOPPY1 PIN 1 LAN2 î P5MT Series IDE connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE1 PI N 1
4-1 1 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 3 . S er i al A TA co n ne c to r s ( 7 -p i n S AT A 1 , S AT A 2, SA T A 3, SA T A4 ) These connectors are for the Serial A T A signal cables for Serial A T A hard disk drives. For P5MT model only: If you installed Serial A T A hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and software RAID 5 conï¬Âguration using the Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology or RAID 0, RAID 1 and RAID 0 1 conï¬Âguration using the LSI MegaRAID î utility embedded on the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge. Serial A T A hard disk drive connection Connector Setting Use SA T A1/SA T A2 Master Boot disk SA T A3/SA T A4 Slave Data disk Thes e conn ectors are se t IDE m ode by defaul t. In IDE mod e, you can co nnect Seri al ATA boot/d ata ha rd disk drive s to th ese co nnector s. If you int end to create a Se rial A TA RAID set u sing th ese co nnector s, set the Conï¬Âgure SA T A as item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section âÂÂ4.3.4 IDE Conï¬Âgurationâ for details. Important notes on Serial A T A ⢠Y ou must install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or Windows î 2003 before using Serial A T A hard disk drives. The Serial A T A RAID feature (RAID 0/RAID 1) is available only if you are using Windows î 2000/2003. ⢠Use only two Serial A T A RAID connectors for each RAID 0 or RAID 1 set. ⢠Wh en usi ng the con nec tor s in ID E m ode , co nne ct the pri mar y ( boo t) h ard di sk driv e t o t he SATA 1 o r S ATA 2 co nne cto r. Refe r t o t he tabl e b elo w f or t he re com mend ed SA T A hard disk drive connections. LAN2 î P5MT Series SA T A connectors SA T A2 GN D RS AT A_ TX P2 RS AT A_ TX N2 GN D RS AT A _R XP2 RS AT A _R XN2 GN D SA T A1 GN D RS AT A_ TX P1 RS AT A_ TX N1 GN D RS AT A _R XP1 RS AT A _R XN1 GN D SA T A4 GN D RS AT A_ TX P4 RS AT A _T XN4 GN D RS AT A _R XP4 RS AT A _R XN4 GN D SA T A3 GN D RS AT A_ TX P3 RS AT A _T XN3 GN D RS AT A _R XP3 RS AT A _R XN3 GN D
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-12 4. Hard disk activity LED connector (4-pin HDLED1) This connector supplies power to the hard disk activity LED. The read or write activities of any device connected to the SCSI connectors or the SA T A connectors cause this LED to light up. 5. USB connector (10-1 pin USB34) This connector is for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. This USB connector complies with USB 2.0 speciï¬Âcation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. LAN2 î P5MT Series SCSI/SA T A card activity LED connector HDLED1 1 ADD_IN_CARD_ACT# NC ADD_IN_CARD_ACT# NC LAN2 î USB 5V USB_P3- USB_P3 GND NC P5MT Series USB 2.0 connector USB34 USB 5V USB_P2- USB_P2 GND The USB port module is purchased separately .
4-13 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6. Ultra320 SCSI connectors (one 68-pin SCSIA1) [P5MT -S model only] This motherboard comes with the Adaptec AIC-7901 PCI-X SCSI U320 controller that supports one 68-Pin Ultra320 SCSI connector . The SCSI channel can support a maximum of 15 SCSI devices as speciï¬Âed by Ultra320 standards. SCSI connection notes This motherboard has a 68-Pin Ultra320 SCSI connector . The onboard SCSI chipset incorporates an advanced multimode I/O cell that supports both single-ended (SE), Ultra2, Ultra160, and Ultra320 devices. With Ultra320 devices, the SCSI bus platform performs at full Ultra320 speeds (up to 320MB/s) and extended cabling 12m (or 25m in a point-to- point conï¬Âguration). When an SE device is attached, the bus defaults to an SE speed and 1.5m cable length. Connect SCSI devices as speciï¬Âed. A SCSI channel should have only one type of SCSI standard (e.g. Ultra320, Ultra160, Ultra2, Ultra-Wide). Mixing SCSI devices on a single channel decreases performance of the slower device. LAN2 î P5MT Series Onboard SCSI connectors 35 68 34 1 SCSIA1 68-Pin Ultra320/ Ultra2-Wide SCSI Connector
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-14 7. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The serial port module is purchased separately . 8. BMC connector (16-pin BMCCONN1) This connector is for the ASUS server management card, if available. LAN2 î P5MT Series Serial port2 (COM2) connector PIN 1 COM2 LAN2 î P5MT Series BMC connector BMCCONN1 5VSB 5VSB BMC SMBCLK 12CCLK1 PSON# BMC_RST# PWROK PSONEN# 5VSB 5VSB BMC SMBDA TA 12CDA TA1 FP_PWRBTN# BMC_PRESENT# BMC_SMI# GND 9. Ambient thermal sensor (2-pin TRPWR1) If you want additional thermal monitoring, connect the thermal sensor cable with thermistor (of 1úK or at 25úC, B=3435) to this connector . LAN2 î P5MT Series TRPWR connector TRPWR1 SYS-THEAMAL2 GND
4-15 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 10. CPU and system fan connectors (3-pin CPU_F AN1/2, REAR_F AN1/2, FRNT_F AN1/2) The fa n conn ectors supp ort co oling fans o f 350 mA ~ 740 mA (8.88 W max.) or a total of 2.1 A ~ 4.44 A (53.28 W max.) at 12V . Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector . Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufï¬Âcient air ï¬Âow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! 1 1. Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) This connector allows you to connect SMBus (System Management Bus) devices. Devices communicate with an SMBus host and/or other SMBus devices using the SMBus interface. LAN2 î P5MT Series SMBus connector BPSMB1 1 I2C_CLK GND I2C_DA T A 5V F ANOUT LAN2 î P5MT Series Fan connectors REAR_F AN2 REAR_F AN1 FRNT_F AN1 FRNT_F AN2 CPU_F AN2 CPU_F AN1 CPU_FAN2 REAR_FAN2 REAR_FAN1 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 CPU_FAN1 GND F ANPWR PWM ROT ATION GND F ANPWR PWM ROT ATION GND Rotation F ANPWR GND Rotation F ANPWR GND Rotation F ANPWR GND Rotation F ANPWR
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-16 12. Power supply SMBus connector (5-pin PSUSMB1) This connector is for the power supply SMB cable, if your power supply supports the SMBus function. 13. SSI pow er con nec to rs (2 4-p in AT XP WR1 , 8-pin A TX12V2) T he s e c o nn e ct o rs ar e fo r S S I p ow e r s u pp l y p lu g s . T he po w er s up p ly pl u gs a re d es i gn e d t o ﬠt t h es e co n ne c to r s i n o n ly on e o r i en t at i on . F i n d t he pr o pe r or i en t at i on a nd pu s h d o wn ï¬Âr m ly u nt i l t he co n n ec t or s c o mp l e te l y ﬠt. ⢠Use of an SSI 12 V Speciï¬Âcation 2.0-compliant power supply unit (PSU) that provides a minimum power of 450 W is recommended for a fully- conï¬Âgured system. ⢠By default, four A TX12V2 connector pins are covered to prevent incorrent insertion of a 4-pin A TX 12V power plug. Remove this cover when using a PSU with an 8-pin A TX 12V power plug. ⢠Do not forget to connect the 4-pin or 8-pin A TX 12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠Us e o f a PS U wi th a h igh er p owe r o utp ut i s r eco mme nded wh en con ï¬Âgur ing a sys tem wit h m ore pow er con sum ing dev ice s. The sys tem ma y be com e un sta ble or may no t bo ot up if the pow er is inad equ ate . ⢠Y ou must install a PSU with a higher power rating if you intend to install additional devices. LAN2 î P5MT Series Power supply SMBus connector PSUSMB1 3.3V Remote Sense GND NC PSU_I2CDA TA PSU_I2CCLK LAN2 î P5MT Series A TX power connectors 24-pin Power Connector A TX12V2 A TXPWR1 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts 1 Ground GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC
4-17 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 14. System panel connector (20-pin P ANEL1) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector . The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power , and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector . The IDE LED lights up or ï¬Âashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker . The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠A TX power button/soft-off button (Light Green 2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF . ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power . ⢠Message LED (Brown 2-pin MLED) This connector is for the message LED cable that connects to the front panel message LED. The message LED indicates the booting status. The LED blinks when the system is in the boot process until the oprating system in loaded. The system panel connector is color-coded for easy connection. LAN2 î P5MT Series System panel connector P ANEL1 MLED- GND NC POWERBTN# 5V GND GND NC POWERLED HDLED GND HDLED- POWERLED- MLED NMIBTN# GND RESETBTN# SPKROUT GND
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-18 15. Auxiliary panel connector (20-pin AUX_P ANEL1) This connector is for additional front panel features including front panel SMB, locator LED and switch, chassis intrusion, and LAN LEDs. ⢠Front panel SMB (6-1 pin FPSMB) These leads connect the front panel SMBus cable. ⢠LAN activity LED (2-pin LAN1_LED, LAN2_LED) These leads are for Gigabit LAN activity LEDs on the front panel. ⢠Chassis intrusion (2-pin CHASSIS) These leads are for the intrusion detection feature for chassis with intrusion sensor or microswitch. When you remove any chassis component, the sensor triggers and sends a high-level signal to these leads to record a chassis intrusion event. ⢠Locator LED (6-pin LOCA TOR) The se leads are fo r the lo cat or swi tch an d LED on th e f ront p anel. Front panel SMB LAN activity LED Chassis intrusion Locator LED and switch LAN2 î P5MT Series Auxiliary panel connector AUX_P ANEL1 I2C_4_DA TA# LOCA TORLED1 5VSB LOCA TORLED1- LAN1_LINKACTLED- LOCA TORBTN# LAN1_LINKACTLED GND 5VSB I2C_4_CLK# GND GND LAN2_LINKACTLED LOCA TORLED2- LAN2_LINKACTLED- LOCA TORLED2 CASEOPEN PIN1 NC
3- ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus and describes the BIOS parameters. Chapter 5 BIOS information
Chapter 5: Motherboard information 5-2 5.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk.) 2. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS ï¬Âle fails or gets corrupted.) 3. ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. 5.1.1 Creating a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB ï¬Âoppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows î XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB ï¬Âoppy disk to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. b. Click Start from the Windows î desktop, then select My Computer . c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File from the menu, then select Format. A Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk window appears. e. Windows î XP users: Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options ï¬Âeld, then click Start. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS ï¬Âle to the bootable ï¬Âoppy disk. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS ï¬Âle to a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities.
5-3 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5.1.2 AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS ï¬Âle in DOS environment using a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk with the updated BIOS ï¬Âle. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS ï¬Âle that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS T o copy the current BIOS ï¬Âle using the AFUDOS utility: The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS ï¬Âle. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS ï¬Âle to the ï¬Âoppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AM I F irm war e Up dat e U til it y - V ers ion 1 .1 9(A SUS V2 .0 7( 03. 11. 24B B) ) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can M egat rend s, In c. A ll r ights res erve d. Reading ï¬Âash ..... done Write to ï¬Âle...... ok A:\> Main ï¬Âlename Extension name 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable ï¬Âoppy disk you created earlier . 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[ï¬Âlename] where the [ï¬Âlename] is any user-assigned ï¬Âlename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main ï¬Âlename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom ⢠Make sure that the ï¬Âoppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1024 KB free space to save the ï¬Âle. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only . The actual BIOS screen displays may not be the same as shown.
Chapter 5: Motherboard information 5-4 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable ï¬Âoppy disk you created earlier . 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[ï¬Âlename] where [ï¬Âlename] is the latest or the original BIOS ï¬Âle on the bootable ï¬Âoppy disk. Updating the BIOS ï¬Âle T o update the BIOS ï¬Âle using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) and download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle for the motherboard. Save the BIOS ï¬Âle to a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5MT.rom Write the BIOS ï¬Âlename on a piece of paper . Y ou need to type the exact BIOS ï¬Âlename at the DOS prompt. Use the appropriate BIOS ï¬Âle depending on your motherboard model (e.g. P5MT .ROM or P5MTS.ROM ) A:\>afudos /iP5MT.ROM AM I F irm war e Up dat e U til it y - V ers ion 1 .1 9(A SUS V2 .0 7( 03. 11. 24B B) ) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can M egat rend s, In c. A ll r ights res erve d. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during ï¬Âash BIOS Reading ï¬Âle ....... done Reading ï¬Âash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing ï¬Âash ...... done Writing ï¬Âash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility veriï¬Âes the ï¬Âle and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure!
5-5 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5MT.ROM AM I F irm war e Up dat e U til it y - V ers ion 1 .1 9(A SUS V2 .0 7( 03. 11. 24B B) ) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can M egat rend s, In c. A ll r ights res erve d. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during ï¬Âash BIOS Reading ï¬Âle ....... done Reading ï¬Âash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing ï¬Âash ...... done Writing ï¬Âash ...... done Verifying ï¬Âash .... done Please restart your computer A:\>
Chapter 5: Motherboard information 5-6 5.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS ï¬Âle when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Y ou can update a corrupted BIOS ï¬Âle using the motherboard support CD or the ï¬Âoppy disk that contains the updated BIOS ï¬Âle. Recovering the BIOS from a ï¬Âoppy disk T o recover the BIOS from a ï¬Âoppy disk: 1. T urn on the system. 2. Insert the ï¬Âoppy disk with the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the ï¬Âoppy disk for the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... Floppy found! Reading ï¬Âle âÂÂP5MT.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start ï¬Âashing... When found, the utility reads the BIOS ï¬Âle and starts ï¬Âashing the corrupted BIOS ï¬Âle. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! ⢠Prepare the motherboard support CD or the ï¬Âoppy disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility . ⢠Make sure that you rename the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle in the ï¬Âoppy disk according the exact name of your motherboard, e.g. P5MT .ROM or P5MTS.ROM .
5-7 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 Recovering the BIOS from the support CD T o recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Remove any ï¬Âoppy disk from the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then turn on the system. 2. Insert the support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the ï¬Âoppy disk for the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... Floppy not found! Checking for CD-ROM... CD-ROM found! Reading ï¬Âle âÂÂP5MT.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start ï¬Âashing... When no ï¬Âoppy disk is found, the utility automatically checks the optical drive for the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle. The utility then updates the corrupted BIOS ï¬Âle. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle.
Chapter 5: Motherboard information 5-8 Installing ASUS Update T o install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX . 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 5.1.4 ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS ï¬Âle ⢠Download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS ï¬Âle ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Quit all Microsoft î Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility .
5-9 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network trafï¬Âc, or click Auto Select. Click Next. Updating the BIOS through the Internet T o update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next.
Chapter 5: Motherboard information 5-10 Updating the BIOS through a BIOS ï¬Âle T o update the BIOS through a BIOS ï¬Âle: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a ï¬Âle option from the drop-down menu, then click Next. 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS ï¬Âle from the Open window , then click Save. 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-1 1 5.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable ï¬Ârmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section âÂÂ5.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconï¬Âguring your system, or prompted to âÂÂRun SetupâÂÂ. This section explains how to conï¬Âgure your system using this utility . Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the conï¬Âguration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconï¬Âgure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the ï¬Ârmware hub. The ï¬Ârmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility . When you start up the computer , the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On-Self-T est (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST , restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. Y ou can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the ï¬Ârst two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit Menu. See section âÂÂ5.8 Exit Menu.â â¢ The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only , and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle for this motherboard.
5-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.2.2 Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conï¬Âguration Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) conï¬Âguration Boot For changing the system boot conï¬Âguration Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings T o select an item on the menu bar , press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 5.2.3 Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. 5.2.1 BIOS menu screen Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another . System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 06/17/2005] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] IDE Conï¬Âguration System Information Navigation keys General help Menu bar Sub-menu items Conï¬Âguration ï¬Âelds Menu items Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. Use [ENTER]. [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Exit
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-13 5.2.4 Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciï¬Âc items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power , Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 5.2.5 Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. T o display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 5.2.6 Conï¬Âguration ï¬Âelds These ï¬Âelds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user- conï¬Âgurable, you can change the value of the ï¬Âeld opposite the item. Y ou cannot select an item that is not user-conï¬Âgurable. A conï¬Âgurable ï¬Âeld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. T o change the value of a ï¬Âeld, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to âÂÂ5.2.7 Pop-up window .â 5.2.7 Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conï¬Âguration options for that item. 5.2.8 Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not ï¬Ât on the screen. Press the Up/ Down arrow keys or <Page Up> /<Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 5.2.9 General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. Main menu items System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 06/17/2005] Legacy Diskette A[1.44M, 3.5 in] IDE Conï¬Âguration System Information BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Security Boot Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit APM Conï¬Âguration Power Management/APM [Enabled] Video Power Down Mode [Suspend] Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend] Suspend Time Out(Minute) [Disabled] Throttle Slow Clock Ratio [50%] Power Button Function [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On by PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On by PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On Ring [Disabled] Power On PME# [Disabled] Power On RTC Alarm [Disabled] Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Scroll bar Pop-up window
5-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 5.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xx] Allows you to set the system time. 5.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 5.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of ï¬Âoppy drive installed. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] Refer to section âÂÂ5.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Mon 05/27/2005] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] IDE Conï¬Âguration System Information Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Use [ENTER]. [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-15 A T A/IDE Conï¬Âguration [Enhanced] Allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the installed operating system (OS). Set to [Enhanced] if you are using native OS, e.g. Windows î 2000/ XP . Set to [Compatible] if you are using legacy OS, e.g. Windows ME/98/NT , MS- DOS. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Compatible] [Enhanced] The items Conï¬Âgure SA T A as and Third, Fourth IDE Master/Slave options appear only when you set the A T A/IDE Conï¬Âguration to [Enhanced]. 5.3.4 IDE Conï¬Âguration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the conï¬Âgurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you wish to conï¬Âgure the item. IDE Conï¬Âguration ATA/IDE Conï¬Âguration [Enhanced] Conï¬Âgure SATA as [IDE] Primary IDE Master : [Not Detected] Primary IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Secondary IDE Master : [Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Third IDE Master : [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave : [Not Detected] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] Set [Compatible Mode] when Legacy OS (i.e. WIN ME, 98, NT4.0, MS DOS)is used. Set [Enhanced Mode] when Native OS (i.e. WIN2000, WIN XP) is used. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. Configure SA T A As [IDE] Sets the conï¬Âguration for the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge chip. If you want to use the Serial A T A hard disk drives as Parallel A T A physical storage devices, set this item to [IDE]. Set this item to [RAID], if you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, or software RAID 5 conï¬Âgurations using the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager or if you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 conï¬Âgurations using the LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Setup Utility . The AHCI allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial A T A features that enhance storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands.
5-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup If you want the Serial A T A hard disk drives to use the Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI), set this item to [AHCI]. For details on AHCI, go to: www .intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012304.htm www .intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012305.htm The SA T A controller is set to Native mode when this item is set to [RAID] or [AHCI]. 5.3.5 Primary , Secondary , Third, Fourth IDE Master/Slave The BIOS automatically detects the connected IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item, then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. Primary IDE Master Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST32122A Size : 2.1GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : Supported Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] Select the type of device connected to the system. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, V endor , Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-conï¬Âgurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. Legacy IDE Channels [SA T A Pri, P A T A Sec] Allows you to set Serial A T A, Parallel A T A, or both, to native mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [SA T A Only] [P A T A Pri, SA T A Sec] [SA T A Pri, P A T A Sec] [P A T A Only] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] Selects the time our value (in seconds) for detecting A T A/A T API devices. Conï¬Âguration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] The item Legacy IDE Channels appears only when you set the A T A/IDE Conï¬Âguration to [Compatible].
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-17 T ype [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are speciï¬Âcally conï¬Âguring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (A T API Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP , LS-120, or MO drive. Conï¬Âguration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector T ransfer) [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] DMA Mode [Auto] Selects the DMA mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] SMART Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting T echnology . Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data T ransfer [Disabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
5-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.3.6 System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system speciï¬Âcations. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. AMI BIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information. Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU speciï¬Âcation. System Memory Displays the auto-detected total system memory . AMIBIOS Version : 08.00.11 Build Date : 12/01/05 Processor Type : Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Speed : 3200 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Total : 1024MB Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-19 5.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. T ake caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect ï¬Âeld values can cause the system to malfunction. MPS Conï¬Âguration CPU Conï¬Âguration Chipset Onboard Devices Conï¬Âguration PCIPnP Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Conï¬Âgure the Multi-Processor Table. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Select MPS Revision. MPS Conï¬Âguration MPS Revision [1.4] 5.4.1 MPS Conï¬Âguration MPS Revision [1.4] Allows you to select the multi-processor system version. Conï¬Âguration options: [1.1] [1.4] v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.
5-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.4.2 CPU Conï¬Âguration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. NOTE: If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conï¬Âgure Advanced CPU settings Module Version: 3C.0B Manufacturer: Intel Brand String: Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Frequency : 3.40 GHz FSB Speed : 800 MHz Cache L1 : 16 KB Cache L2 : 1024 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked (Max:17, Min:14) Ratio Actual Value: 17 Ratio CMOS Setting [ 16] Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Execute Disable Bit [Enabled] Hyper Threading Technology [Enabled] Y ou can only adjust the Ratio CMOS Setting if you installed an unlocked CPU. Refer to the CPU documentation for details. Ratio CMOS Setting [ 16] Sets the ratio between the CPU Core Clock and the Front Side Bus frequency . The default value of this item is auto-detected by the BIOS. Use the < > or <-> keys to adjust the values. Conï¬Âguration options: [8]...[28] Max CPUID V alue Limit [Disabled] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Execute Disable Bit [Enabled] When this item is set to [Disabled], the BIOS forces the XD feature ï¬Âag to always return to (0). Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hyper-Threading T echnology [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper-Threading T echnology . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Hyper-Threading T echnology item appears only when you installed an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Hyper-Threading T echnology . Hyper- Threading is not supported when you installed a dual-core CPU. v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-21 C1E Support [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], BIOS automatically checks the CPU capability to enable C1E support. In C1E mode, the CPU has lower power consumption when idle. Conï¬Âguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Single Logical Processor Mode [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the single logical processor mode for dual-core CPUs. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Intel(R) SpeedStep T echnology [Automatic] Allows you to use the Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology . When set to [Automatic], you can adjust the system power settings in the operating system to use the EIST feature. Se t t his it em t o [ Dis abl ed ] if you do not want to use the EIST . Conï¬Âguration options: [Automatic] [Disabled] The following items appear only when you installed an Intel î Pentium î 4 dual- core CPU. The motherboard comes with a BIOS ï¬Âle that supports EIST .
5-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Onboard LAN Boot ROM [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard LAN controller . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Onboard SCSI Boot ROM [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard SCSI controller . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 5.4.3 Chipset Conï¬Âguration The Chipset Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conï¬Âgure North Bridge feature Advanced Chipset Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. North Bridge Conï¬Âguration South Bridge Conï¬Âguration Intel PCI-X Hub Conï¬Âguration Onboard LAN Boot ROM [Enabled] Onboard SCSI Boot ROM [Enabled]
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-23 NorthBridge Conï¬Âguration The NorthBridge Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the Northbridge related settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced ENABLE: Allow remapping of overlapped PCI memory above the total physical memory. DISABLE: Do not allow remapping of memory. North Bridge Chipset Conï¬Âguration Memory Remap Feature [Enabled] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Conï¬Âgure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Boot Graphics Adapter Priority[PEG/PCI] PEG Port Conï¬Âguration PEG Port [Auto] Memory Remap Feature [Enabled] Allows you to remap the overlap PCI memory over the total physical memory . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR operating frequency . Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [533 MHz] [667 MHz] Conï¬Âgure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. The following sub-items appear when this item is disabled. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM CAS# Latency [5] Controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Conï¬Âguration options: [5] [4] [3] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [6 DRAM Clocks] Controls the latency between the DDR SDRAM active command and the read/write command. Conï¬Âguration options: [2 DRAM Clocks] [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks] [5 DRAM Clocks] [6 DRAM Clocks] DRAM RAS# Precharge [6 DRAM Clocks] Controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DDR SDRAM. Conï¬Âguration options: [2 DRAM Clocks] [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks] [5 DRAM Clocks] [6 DRAM Clocks]
5-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup DRAM RAS# Activate to Precharge Delay [15 DRAM Clocks] Conï¬Âguration options: [4 DRAM Clocks] [5 DRAM Clocks] ~ [15 DRAM Clocks] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PEG/PCI] Allows selection of the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. Conï¬Âguration options: [PEG/PCI] [PCI/PEG] PEG Port Conï¬Âguration PEG Port [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Graphic port. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] SouthBridge Conï¬Âguration The SouthBridge Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the Southbridge related settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced To select number of UHCI USB Ports (USB 1.1) to be enabled. South Bridge Chipset Conï¬Âguration USB Function [4 USB Ports] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] PCIE Ports Conï¬Âguration PCI Express Port 0 [Auto] PCI Express Port 4 [Auto] PCI Express Port 5 [Auto] USB Function [4 USB Ports] Allows you to enable a speciï¬Âc number of USB ports, or disable the USB function. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [2 USB Ports] [4 USB Ports] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller . Conï¬Âguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled]
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-25 PCIE Port Conï¬Âguration PCI Express Port 0 [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Port 0. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] PCI Express Port 4 [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Port 4. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] PCI Express Port 5 [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Port 5. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] Intel PCI-X Hub Conï¬Âguration The Intel PCI-X Hub Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the Intel PCI Express controller related settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Select the decode range for IO. Conï¬Âgure advanced settings for PCI-X Hub I/O Port Decode [4K Decode] VGA 16-Bit Decode [Enabled] I/O Port Decode [4K Decode] Allows you to set the decode range for the I/O controller . Conï¬Âguration options: [4K Decode] [1K Decode] VGA 16-Bit Decode [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the decode for the VGA controller . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
5-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.4.4 Onboard Devices Conï¬Âguration Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Allows BIOS to Enable or Disable Floppy Controller. Conï¬Âgure W83627EHF-A Super IO Chipset Onboard Floppy Controller [Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3FB/IRQ4] Serial Port2 Address [2FB/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Mode [Normal] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Mode [Normal] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Onboard Floppy Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable the onboard ï¬Âoppy disk drive controller . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Allows you to select the Serial Port2 base address. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Mode [Normal] Allows you to select the Serial Port2 mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Normal] [IrDA] [ASK IR] Parallel Port Address [378] Allows you to select the Parallel Port base addresses. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [378] [278] [3BC] Parallel Port Mode [Normal] Allows you to select the Parallel Port mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Normal] [Bi-directional] [ECP] [EPP] [ECP & EPP] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Conï¬Âguration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ7]
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-27 Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced 5.4.5 PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. T ake caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect ï¬Âeld values can cause the system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS conï¬Âgures all the devices in the system. When set to [Y es] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system conï¬Âgures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. Conï¬Âguration options: [No] [Y es] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register . Conï¬Âguration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Y es] When set to [Y es], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Conï¬Âguration options: [No] [Y es] Palette Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the pallete snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] When set to [PCI Device], the speciï¬Âc IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Conï¬Âguration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved] Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] NO : L ets th e BI OS co nï¬Âg ue all t he de vic es in th e sys tem . YE S: Let s t he op era tin g s ys te m co nï¬Âg ure Pl ug a nd Pla y (P nP) de vic es n ot re qui red fo r bo ot if yo ur sys tem h as a Plu g an d P lay op er at ing sy ste m.
5-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.5 Power Conï¬Âguration The Power Conï¬Âguration menu items allow you to change the settings for the ACPI and Advanced Power Management (APM) features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬Âguration options. 5.5.1 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Conï¬Âguration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conï¬Âguration Hardware Monitor Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Include ACPI APIC table pointer to RSDT pointer list. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Sever Boot Exit Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power Enable or disable APM. APM Conï¬Âguration Power Management/APM [Enabled] Video Power Down Mode [Suspend] Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend] Standby Time Out [Disabled] Suspend Time Out [Disabled] Throttle Slow Clock Ratio [50%] System Thermal [Disabled] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Last State] Resume On Ring [Disabled] Resume On LAN [Disabled] Resume By PME# [Disabled] Resume By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Resume By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power Management [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the motherboard Advance Power Management (APM) feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] 5.5.2 APM Conï¬Âguration v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-29 Video Power Down Mode [Suspend] Allows you to select the video power down mode Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Standby] [Suspend] Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend] Allows you to select the hard disk power down mode Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Standby] [Suspend] Standby Time Out [Disabled] Allows you to select the speciï¬Âed time at which the system goes on standy mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [1 Min] [2 Min] [4 Min] [8 Min] [10 Min] [20 Min] [30 Min] [40 Min] [50 Min] [60 Min] Suspend Time Out [Disabled] Allows you to select the speciï¬Âed time at which the system goes on suspend mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [1 Min] [2 Min] [4 Min] [8 Min] [10 Min] [20 Min] [30 Min] [40 Min] [50 Min] [60 Min] Throttle Slow Clock Ratio [50%] Allows you to select duty cycle in throttle mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [87.5%] [75.0%] [62.5%] [50.0%] [37.5%] [25.0%] [12.5%] System Thermal [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the system thermal control feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Thermal Active T emperature [60úC/140úF] Allows you to specify the system thermal control activating temperature. Conï¬Âguration options: [40úC/104úF] [45úC/1 13úF] [50úC/122úF] [55úC/131úF] [60úC/140úF] [65úC/149úF] [70úC/158úF] [75úC/167úF] Thermal Slow Clock Ratio [50%] Allows you to select the duty cycle in the throttle when a thermal override condition occurs. Conï¬Âguration options: [87.5%] [75.0%] [62.5%] [50%] [37.5%] [25%] [12.5%] Power Button Function [On/Off] Allows the system to go into On/Off mode or suspend mode when the power button is pressed. Conï¬Âguration options: [On/Off] [Suspend] The Thermal Active T emperature and Thermal Slow Clock Ratio items appear only when the System Thermal item is set to Enabled.
5-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Restore on AC Power Loss [Last State] When set to Power Off, the system goes into of f state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Conï¬Âguration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Resume On Ring [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the system enables the RI to generate a wake event while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Resume On LAN [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the system enables the LAN to generate a wake event while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Resume By PME# [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the system enables the PME to generate a wake event while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Resume By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to [Enabled], the items RTC Alarm Date, R TC Alarm Hour , RTC Alarm Minute, and RTC Alarm Second appear with set values. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following items appear only when the Power On RTC Alarm item is set to Enabled. RTC Alarm Date (Days) [15] T o set the alarm date, highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection. Conï¬Âguration options: [Everyday] [1] [2] [3]...[31] System T ime [12:30:30] T o set the alarm time, highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-31 Resume By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Allows you to use speciï¬Âc keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 5.5.3 Hardware Monitor Use the down arrow key to display additional items. CPU1T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] MB T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Disabled] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power Hardware Monitor CPU1 Temperature [49úC/120úF] MB Temperature [47úC/114úF] CPU Fan1 Speed [3884RPM] CPU Fan2 Speed [N/A] Front Fan1 Speed [N/A] Front Fan2 Speed [N/A] Rear Fan1 Speed [N/A] Rear Fan2 Speed [N/A] Smart Fan Control [Smart Fan II] CPU1 Temperature [061] MB Temperature [050] VCORE1 Voltage [ 1.320V] VCORE2 Voltage [ 1.258V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.345V] 5V Voltage [ 5.094V] CPU1 Temperature F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. 5VSB Voltage [ 4.980V] VBAT Voltage [ 3.120V] 12V Voltage [12.053V]
5-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup CPU Fan1/2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Front Fan1/2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Rear Fan1/2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU, front, and rear fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the ï¬Âeld shows N/A. Smart Fan Control [Smart Fan II] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Smart Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efï¬Âcient system operation. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Smart Fan] [Smart Fan II] The CPU1 T emper atur e and MB T emper ature i tems a ppear w hen yo u set t he Smar t Fan Control item to [Sma rt Fan ] or [S mart F an II]. CPU1 T emperature [XXX] MB T emperature [XXX] Displays the detected CPU and system threshold temperature when the Smart Fan Control is enabled. VCORE1 V oltage, VCORE2 V oltage, 3.3V V oltage, 5V V oltage, 5VSB V oltage, VBA T V oltage, 12V V oltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage outputs through the onboard voltage regulators.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-33 Remote Access [Enabled] Enables or disables the remote access feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Server Select Remote Access type. Conï¬Âgure Remote Access type and parameters Remote Access [Enabled] Serial port number [COM1] Baudrate [19200] Flow Control [None] Redirection After BIOS POST [Always] Terminal Type [ANSI] VT-UTFB Combo Key Support [Disabled] Media Type [Serial] The following items appear only when the Remote Access item is set to [Enabled]. 5.6 Server menu The Server menu items allow you to customize the server features. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Sever Boot Exit Conï¬Âgure Remote Access. Server Features Remote Access Conï¬Âguration Remote Access Conï¬Âguration The items in this menu allows you to conï¬Âgure the Remote Access features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬Âguration options.
5-34 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Serial port number [COM1] Allows you to select serial port for console redirection. Conï¬Âguration options: [COM1] [COM2] Baudrate [19200] Sets the Serial port settings. Conï¬Âguration options: [1 15200] [57600] [38400] [19200] [9600] Flow Control [None] Allows you to select the ï¬Âow control for console redirection. Conï¬Âguration options: [None] [Hardware] [Software] Redirection After BIOS POST [Always] Sets the redirection mode after the BIOS Power-On Self-T est (POST). Some operating systems may not work when this item is set to Always. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Boot Loader] [Always] T erminal T ype [ANSI] Allows you to select the target terminal type. Conï¬Âguration options: [ANSI] [VT100] [VT -UTF8] VT -UTF8 Combo Key Support [Disabled] Enables or disables the VT -UTF8 combo key support for ANSI or VT100 terminals. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Media T ype [Serial] Selects the media for console redirection. Conï¬Âguration options: [Serial] [LAN] [Serial LAN]
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-35 5.7 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Boot Settings Boot Priority Boot Settings Conï¬Âguration Security Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Speciï¬Âes the Boot Device Priority sequence. A virtual ï¬Âoppy disk drive (Floppy Drive B:) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the ï¬Ârst boot device. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit 5.7.1 Boot Device Priority Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Speciï¬Âes the boot sequence from the available devices. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding menu. Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [ATAPI CD-ROM] 2nd Boot Device [Network: MBA v7.7.5] 3rd Boot Device [Network: MBA v7.7.5] 1st Boot Device [A T API CD-ROM] 2nd Boot Device [Network: MBA v7.7.5] 3rd Boot Device [Network: MBA v7.7.5] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. Conï¬Âguration options: [1st FLOPPY Drive] [Network: MBA v7.7.5 Slot 0400] [Network: MBA v7.7.5 Slot 0300] [Disabled] v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.
5-36 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.7.2 Boot Settings Conï¬Âguration Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system. Boot Settings Conï¬Âguration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Conï¬Âguration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] W ait for ûF1ü If Error [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hit ûDEL ü Message Display [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âÂÂPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-37 5.7.3 Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬Âguration options. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Password Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a Supervisor Password: 1. Sel ect the C hange Super vis or Passwo rd ite m, the n pres s <En ter >. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conï¬Ârm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. T o change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear clear it by erasing the CMOS Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM. See section âÂÂ4.2 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. To cl ear th e su per vis or pa ss wor d, sel ec t the Ch ang e Su per vis or Pa ss wor d t hen pr es s <E nte r>. Th e me ssa ge âÂÂPa ss wo rd Uni nst al le dâ app ear s.
5-38 Chapter 4: BIOS setup After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Conï¬Âguration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility . View Only allows access but does not allow change to any ï¬Âeld. Limited allows changes only to selected ï¬Âelds, such as Date and T ime. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the ï¬Âelds in the Setup utility . Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conï¬Ârm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully . T o change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-39 Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility . When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Conï¬Âguration options: [Setup] [Always]
5-40 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.8 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Sever Boot Exit Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults If you made changes to any of the settings in the menus, pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. A conï¬Ârmation window appears and prompts you to either save your changes or cancel the command. Select one of the options from this menu to exit. Exit & Save Changes Select this option then press <Enter>, or simply press <F10>, to save your changes to CMOS before exiting the Setup utility . When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to save your changes and exit Setup. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu. Exit & Discard Changes Select this option then press <Enter> to exit the Setup utility without saving your changes. When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to discard your changes and exit Setup. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu. Discard Changes Select this option then press <Enter> to discard the changes that you made, and restore the previously saved settings. When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to discard the changes, and load the previously saved settings. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-41 Load Setup Defaults Select this option then press <Enter> to load the optimized settings for each of the Setup menu items. When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to load the default settings. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu.
5-42 Chapter 4: BIOS setup
3- ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 This chapter provides information on how toconï¬Âgure your hard disk drives as RAID sets. Chapter 6 RAID Conï¬Âguration
6-2 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.1 Setting up RAID The motherboard comes with the following RAID solutions: P5MT model ⢠LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID technology embedded in the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge supports up to two SA T A hard disk drives and RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 10 conï¬Âgurations. P5MT -S model ⢠Adaptec AIC-7901 PCI-X SCSI controller supports SCSI hard disk drives and RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 0 1 conï¬Âgurations. 6.1.1 RAID deï¬Ânitions RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. T wo hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RA ID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conï¬Âguration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 0 1 is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 0 1 conï¬Âguration you get all the beneï¬Âts of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 conï¬Âgurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. JBOD (Spanning) stands for Just a Bunch of Disks and refers to hard disk drives that are not yet conï¬Âgured as a RAID set. This conï¬Âguration stores the same data redundantly on multiple disks that appear as a single disk on the operating system. Spanning does not deliver any advantage over using separate disks independently and does not provide fault tolerance or other RAID performance beneï¬Âts. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy ï¬Ârst the RAID driver from the support CD to a ï¬Âoppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to Chapter 6 for details.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-3 6.1.2 Installing hard disk drives The motherboard supports Serial A T A (both models) and SCSI hard disk drives (P5MT -S model only) for RAID set conï¬Âguration. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array . T o install the SA T A hard disks for RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. Install the SA T A hard disks into the drive bays following the instructions in the system user guide. 2. Connect a SA T A signal cable to the signal connector at the back of each drive and to the SA T A connector on the motherboard. 3. Connect a SA T A power cable to the power connector on each drive. T o install the SCSI hard disks for RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. Install the SCSI hard disks into the drive bays following the instructions in the system user guide. 2. Connect the SCSI interface cable connectors at the back of the SCSI drives. 3. Connect the other end of the SCSI interface cable to the SCSI connector on the motherboard. 6.1.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS Y ou must set the RAID item in the BIOS Setup before you can create a RAID set from SA T A hard disk drives attached to the SA T A connectors supported by the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge chip. T o do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST . 2. Go to the Main Menu, select IDE Conï¬Âguration, then press <Enter>. 3. Set the A T A/IDE Conï¬Âguration item to [Enhanced Mode], then press <Enter>. 4. Set the Conï¬Âgure SA T A As item to [RAID]. 5. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup.
6-4 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.1.4 RAID conï¬Âguration utilities Depending on the RAID connectors that you use, you can create a RAID set using the utilities embedded in each RAID controller . For example, for P5MT model, use the LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Setup Utility if you installed SA T A hard disk drives on the SA T A connectors supported by the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge. For P5MT -S model, use the Adaptec SCSISelect⢠Utility if you installed SCSI hard disk drives to the SCSI connector(s) supported by the Adaptec AIC-7901 PCI-X SCSI controller . Refer to the succeeding sections for details on how to use each RAID conï¬Âguration utility .
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-5 3. The utility main window appears. Use the arrow keys to select an option from the Management Menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the Management Menu descriptions on the next page. At the bottom of the screen is the legend box. The keys on the legend box allow you to navigate through the setup menu options or execute commands. The keys on the legend box vary according to the menu level. 6.2 LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility Th e L SI Log ic E mbe dde d S AT A RAI D S etu p Ut ili ty all ow s you to cr ea te RA ID 0, RA ID 1, or RA ID 10 set (s) fr om S ATA ha rd di sk dr ive s c on ne cte d t o t he S ATA co nne ct or s su ppo rte d b y th e m oth erb oa rd IC H7R Southbridge chip. T o enter the LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Setup Utility: 1. T urn on the system after installing all the SA T A hard disk drives. 2. During POST , the LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Setup Utility automatically detects the installed SA T A hard disk drives and displays any existing RAID set(s). Press <Ctrl> <M> to enter the utility . The LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID auto conï¬Âgures to RAID 1 when the SA T A to RAID Mode is enabled.
6-6 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration Menu Description Conï¬Âgure Allows you to create RAID 0 or RAID 1 set using the Easy Conï¬Âguration or the New Conï¬Âguration command. This menu also allows you to view , add, or clear RAID conï¬Âgurations or select the boot drive Initialize Allows you to initialize the logical drives of a created RAID set Objects Allows you to initialize logical drives or change the logical drive parameters Rebuild Allows you to rebuild failed drives Check Consistency Allows you to check the data consistency of the logical drives of a created RAID set 6.2.1 Creating a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set The LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Setup Utility allows you to create a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set using two types of conï¬Âgurations: Easy and New . In Easy Conï¬Âguration, the logical drive parameters are set automatically including the size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). In New Conï¬Âguration, you manually set the logical drive parameters and assign the set size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). Using Easy Conï¬Âguration T o create a RAID set using the Easy Conï¬Âguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conï¬Âgure, then press <Enter>. 2. Us e t he arr ow k eys to se le ct Ea sy Con ï¬Âg ur ati on , th en p res s < Ent er >.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-7 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬Âgurable array appears on screen. 3. The ARRA Y SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drives you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y] , where X is the array number , and Y is the drive number . The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
6-8 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬Âgurable array , then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-9 6. Select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 7. Select the RAID level from the menu, then press <Enter>. Yo u n eed at lea st two ide nti cal har d d isk dr ives wh en cre atin g a RA ID 1 se t. 8. When creating a RAID 1 set, select Stripe Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. When creating a RAID 0 set, proceed to step 10. 9. Key-in the stripe size, then press <Enter>. For server system s, we recomme nd tha t you u se a l ower ar ray bl ock siz e. For mult imedia comput er sys tems us ed mai nly for audio and vi deo ed iting, we reco mmend a highe r arra y block size for opt imum p erforma nce.
6-10 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 10. When ï¬Ânished setting the selected logical drive conï¬Âguration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 1 1. When ï¬Ânished setting the selected logical drive conï¬Âguration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 12. Follow steps 5 to 10 to conï¬Âgure additional logical drives. 13. When prompted, save the conï¬Âguration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-1 1 6.2.2 Creating a RAID 10 set Y ou can create a RAID 10 set using four identical hard disk drives. T o create a RAID 10 set using the Easy Conï¬Âguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conï¬Âgure, then press <Enter>. 2. Us e t he arr ow k eys to se le ct Ea sy Con ï¬Âg ur ati on , th en p res s < Ent er >. 3. The ARRA Y SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drive(s) you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y] , where X is the array number, and Y is the drive number . The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
6-12 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬Âgurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬Âgurable array , then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-13 6. Select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 7. Select RAID 10 from the menu, then press <Enter>. Yo u ne ed a t lea st f ou r id ent ic al h ar d dis k dr iv es w hen c re at in g a R AI D 10 s et . 8. Select Stripe Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 9. Key-in the stripe size, then press <Enter>. For server system s, we recomme nd tha t you u se a l ower ar ray bl ock siz e. For mult imedia comput er sys tems us ed mai nly for audio and vi deo ed iting, we reco mmend a highe r arra y block size for opt imum p erforma nce.
6-14 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 10. When ï¬Ânished setting the selected logical drive conï¬Âguration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 1 1. When prompted, save the conï¬Âguration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-15 6.2.3 Adding or viewing a RAID conï¬Âguration Y ou can add a new RAID conï¬Âguration or view an existing conï¬Âguration using the View/Add Conï¬Âguration command. Adding a new RAID conï¬Âguration T o add a new RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. Fro m t he Man agemen t Men u, hig hlight Conï¬Âg ure , t hen p res s < Enter> . 2. Use the arrow keys to select View/Add Conï¬Âguration, then press <Enter>. 3. The ARRA Y SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drive(s) you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y] , where X is the array number , and Y is the drive number . The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
6-16 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬Âgurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬Âgurable array , then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-17 6. Follow steps 6 to 7 of the Creating a RAID set: Using Easy Conï¬Âguration section. 7. Select Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 8. Key-in the desired logical drive size, then press <Enter>. 9. Follow steps 8 to 13 of the Creating a RAID set: Using Easy Conï¬Âguration section to add the new RAID conï¬Âguration.
6-18 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.2.4 Initializing the logical drives After creating the RAID set(s), you must initialize the logical drives. Y ou may initialize the logical drives of a RAID set(s) using the Initialize or Objects command on the Management Menu. Using the Initialize command T o initialize the logical drive using the Initialize command: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Initialize, then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to initialize. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <Enter>.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-19 3. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Y es from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. Y ou may also press <F10> to initialize the drive without conï¬Ârmation. Initializing a logical drive(s) erases all data on the drive. 4. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization.
6-20 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 5. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>. Using the Objects command T o initialize the logical drives using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Objects, then press <Enter>.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-21 2. Select Logical Drive from the Objects sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 3. Select the logical drive to initialize from the Logical Drives sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 4. Select Initialize from the pop-up menu, then press <Enter> to start initialization.
6-22 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 5. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Y es from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. Y ou may also press <F10> to initialize the drive without conï¬Ârmation. 6. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization. 7. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-23 6.2.5 Rebuilding failed drives Y ou can manually rebuild failed hard disk drives using the Rebuild command in the Management Menu. T o rebuild a failed hard disk drive: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Rebuild, then press <Enter>. 2. The PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drive you want to rebuild, then press <SpaceBar>.
6-24 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 3. After selecting the drive to rebuild, press <F10>. The indicator for the selected drive now shows RBLD. 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to rebuild the drive. 5. When rebuild is complete, press any key to continue.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-25 6.2.6 Checking the drives for data consistency Y ou can check and verify the accuracy of data redundancy in the selected logical drive. The utility can automatically detect and/or detect and correct any dif ferences in data redundancy depending on the selected option in the Objects > Adapter menu. The Check Consistency command is available only for logical drives included in a RAID 1 set. Using the Check Consistency T o check data consistency using the Check Consistency command: 1. From the Management Menu, select Check Consistency , then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to check. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <Enter>.
6-26 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 3. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Y es from the Consistency Check dialog box, then press <Enter>. Y ou may also press <F10> to check the drive consistency . A progress bar appears on screen. 4. While checking the disk consistency , press <Esc> to display the following options. ⢠Stop - Stops the consistency check. The utility stores the percentage of disk checked, When you restart checking, it continues from the last percentage completed rather than from zero percent. ⢠Continue - Continues the consistency check. ⢠Abort - Aborts the consistency check. When you restart checking, it continues from zero percent. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-27 Using the Objects command T o check data consistency using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects, then select Logical Drive from the menu. 2. Use the arrow keys to select the logical dri ve you want to check, then press <Enter>. 3 . S e le ct C he ck C on si st en cy f r o m th e po p- up m en u, t he n p r es s <E nt er >. 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to check the drive. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue.
6-28 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.2.7 Deleting a RAID conï¬Âguration T o delete a RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. From the Management Menu, select Conï¬Âgure > Clear Conï¬Âguration, then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Y es from the Clear Conï¬Âguration? dialog box, then press <Enter>. The utility clears the current array . 3. Press any key to continue.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-29 6.2.8 Selecting the boot drive from a RAID set Y ou must have created a new RAID conï¬Âguration before you can select the boot drive from a RAID set. Refer to the Creating a RAID set: Using New Conï¬Âguration section for details. T o select the boot drive from a RAID set: 1. From the Management Menu, select Conï¬Âgure > Select Boot Drive, then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select the bootable logical drive from the list, then press <Enter>. 3. The logical drive is selected as boot drive. Press any key to continue.
6-30 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.2.9 Enabling the WriteCache Y ou may enable the RAID controller üs WriteCache option to improve the data transmission performance. Wh en you ena ble Wr iteC ach e, you may lo se dat a wh en a p owe r in ter rup tio n oc cur s wh ile tra nsm itt ing or exc han gin g da ta amo ng the dri ves . T o enable WriteCache: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects > Adapter, then press <Enter> to display the adapter properties. 2. Select WriteCache, then press <Enter> to turn the option On (enabled). 6.3 Global Array Manager Y ou may also create a RAID set(s) in Windows î operating environment using the Global Array Manager (GAM) application. The GAM application is available from the motherboard support CD. Refer to the GAM user guide in the motherboard support CD for details. 3. When ï¬Ânished, press any key to continue.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-31 6.4 Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility! (P5MT -S model only) The Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility allows you to create RAID 0, 1, and 0 1 set(s) from SCSI hard disk drives connected to the SCSI connector supported by the Adaptec embedded SCSI controller . T o enter the Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility!: 1. T urn on the system after installing all the SCSI hard disk drives. 2. During POST , the Adaptec SCSI BIOS automatically detects the installed SCSI hard disk drives and displays any existing RAID set(s). Press <Ctrl> <A> to enter the utility . 3. The utility auto-detects the available SCSI channels. Select the SCSI channel, then press <Enter>.
6-32 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.4.1 Conï¬Âguring the SCSI controller Y ou need to conï¬Âgure the SCSI controller before creating a RAID set. After selecting the SCSI channel to use, the utility prompts you to select from the available options. Use the arrow keys to select Conï¬Âgure/View SCSI Controller Settings , then press <Enter>.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-33 6.4.2 Enabling the HostRAID controller T o enable the Adaptec HostRAID controller: 1. Use the arrow keys to select the HostRAID item in the Conï¬Âguration section. 2. Press <Enter> to set the item to Enabled. 3. Press <Esc> to exit. 4. When the utility prompts you to save the changes, select Y es , then press <Enter>. The screen returns to the options menu.
6-34 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.4.3 Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) T o create a RAID 0 set for Performance: 1. After enabling the HostRAID, the utility returns to the initial menu. Use the arrow keys to select Conï¬Âgure/View HostRAID Settings, then press <Enter>. 2. The utility displays the installed SCSI hard disk drives status and menu options. When available, the HDD status shows Free. Press < C>. The utility does not display an installed SCSI HDD(s) with an existing RAID condiguration or is part of an existing RAID set. Use the SCSI Disk Utilities to reformat the HDD(s), or use the previous RAID card to clear the RAID conï¬Âguration on the HDD(s).
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-35 3. Select RAID-0 (High Performance, No Fault T olerance) from the Select RAID T ype menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the Striping Requirements note at the bottom of the screen to determine the number of hard disk drives required for the selected RAID type. 4. Use the arrow keys to select a RAID set member , then press <SpaceBar> to mark. An X mark appears after the selected HDD. 5. Follow the step 4 to select the other members of the RAID set, then press <Enter> when ï¬Ânished.
6-36 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6. Select the stripe size from the menu, then press <Enter>. For server system s, we recomme nd tha t you u se a l ower ar ray bl ock siz e. For mult imedia comput er sys tems us ed mai nly for audio and vi deo ed iting, we reco mmend a highe r arra y block size for opt imum p erforma nce. 7. When prompted, use the keyboard to assign a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>. 8. If you want to make the array bootable, select Y es from the menu, then press <Enter>. 9. When prompted to create the RAID 0 set, select Y es , then press <Enter>. A Build Complete message appears to indicate that you have successfully created the RAID 0 set. The utility erases all data from the selected hard disk drives. Make sure to backup all important data before creating a RAID set.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-37 10. The screen displays the information on the created RAID set. Press <Esc> to exit the utility . 6.4.4 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) T o create a RAID 1 set for Fault T olerance: 1. Follow steps 1 to 2 of the Creating a RAID 0 set section. 2. Select RAID-1 (Fault T olerance) from the Select RAID T ype menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the Mirroring Requirements note at the bottom of the screen to determine the number of hard disk drives required for the selected RAID type.
6-38 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 3. Use the arrow keys to select a RAID set member , then press <SpaceBar> to mark. An X mark appears after the selected HDD. 4. Follow step 3 to select the other members of the RAID set, then press <Enter> when ï¬Ânished. 5. Select Create new RAID-1 from the RAID-1 Build Option menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the options description below . ⢠Create a New RAID-1 - The default option. Select this option when creating a new RAID 1 set. ⢠Copy from ( 0) to ( 1) - Select this option when you want to copy the source drive contents to a target drive, provided that the source is equal to or smaller than the target drive. ⢠Copy from ( 1) to ( 0) - Select this option when you want to copy the source drive contents to a target drive, provided that the source is larger than the target drive.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-39 6. When prompted, use the keyboard to assign a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 7. If you want to make the array bootable, select Y es from the menu, then press <Enter>. 8. When prompted to create the RAID 1 set, select Y es , then press <Enter>. The utility erases all data from the selected hard disk drives. Make sure to backup all important data before creating a RAID set. 9. When a conï¬Ârmation dialogue box appears, select Y es , then press <Enter>. 10. The utility builds the RAID 1 set and displays a progress bar at the center of the screen. Press <Esc> if you want to stop the building process.
6-40 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 1 1. The screen displays the information on the created RAID set. Press <Esc> to exit the utility . A Build Complete message appears to indicate that you have successfully created the RAID 1 set.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-41 6.4.5 Creating a RAID 10 set (Stripe Mirror) T o create a RAID 10 set for Fault T olerance and Performance: 1. After enabling the HostRAID, the utility returns to the initial menu. Use the arrow keys to select Conï¬Âgure/View HostRAID Settings, then press <Enter>. 2. The utility displays the SCSI hard disk drives installed in your computer and the menu options. Press < C>.
6-42 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 3. Select RAID-10 (Fault T olerance, High Performance) from the Select RAID T ype menu, then press <Enter>. 4. Use the arrow keys to select a RAID set member , then press <SpaceBar> to mark. An X mark appears after the selected HDD. 5. Follow the step 4 to select the other members of the RAID set, then press <Enter> when ï¬Ânished. Refer to the Striping/Mirroring Requirements note at the bottom of the screen to determine the number of hard disk drives required for the selected RAID type.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-43 6. Select the stripe size from the menu, then press <Enter>. For server system s, we recomme nd tha t you u se a l ower ar ray bl ock siz e. For mult imedia comput er sys tems us ed mai nly for audio and vi deo ed iting, we reco mmend a highe r arra y block size for opt imum p erforma nce. 7. When prompted, use the keyboard to assign a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 8. If you want to make the array bootable, select Y es from the menu, then press <Enter>. 9. When prompted to create the RAID 10 set, select <Y es>, then press <Enter>. A Build Complete message appears to indicate that you have successfully created the RAID 10 set. The utility erases all data from the selected hard disk drives. Make sure to backup all important data before creating a RAID set.
6-44 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 10. The screen displays the information on the created RAID set. Press <Esc> to exit the utility .
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-45 6.4.6 Adding a spare drive to a RAID 10 set T o add a spare drive to a RAID 10 set: 1. Press <S> from the Conï¬Âgure/View Host RAID Settings menu. 2. Select Add Spare from the Options menu, then press <Enter>. 3. Use the arrow keys to select the spare drive from the list, then press <Enter>. 4. When a conï¬Ârmation dialogue box appears, select Y es , then press <Enter>.
6-46 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 5. The screen displays the information on the added spare drive. Press <Esc> to exit the utility . 6.4.7 Deleting a RAID 10 set spare drive T o delete a RAID 10 set spare drive: 1. From the utility main menu, press <S>, select Delete Spare from the Options menu, then press <Enter>.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-47 3. When a conï¬Ârmation dialogue box appears, select Y es , then press <Enter> to delete the spare drive. 4. Press <ESC> to exit the utility . 2. The screen displays the available spare drive(s). Use the arrow keys to select the spare drive you want to delete, then press <Enter>.
6-48 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.4.8 Deleting a RAID set T o delete a RAID set: 1. Press <D> from the Conï¬Âgure/View Host RAID Settings menu. 3. When prompted, select Y es from the Delete Array? menu, then press <Enter>. Y ou lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID set. Make sure to back up all important data before deleting a RAID set. 4. Press <ESC> to exit the utility . 2. For RAID 0 and RAID 10 set, go to step 3. For a RAID 1 set, select a delete option from the menu (see below), then go to step 3. ⢠Drive ID 1 - Deletes all data on drive 1 ⢠Drive ID 2 - Deletes all data on drive 2 ⢠Drive ID 1 & 2 - Deletes all data on both drives ⢠None - Breaks the array but keeps all existing data on both drives
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-49 6.4.9 Rebuilding a RAID set 2. Press < R>. While rebuilding the array , you can press <Esc> to stop. A pop-up menu appears for conï¬Ârmation. Select Y es to stop rebuilding and return to the main menu. A Build/Rebuild Completed message appears on screen to indicate that you have successfully rebuilt the array . 3. Press any key to return to the main menu. The rebuild option is available only for RAID 1 and RAID 10 sets. T o rebuild a RAID set: 1. From the main menu, select the RAID set you want to rebuild, then press <Enter>.
6-50 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.4.10 V erifying a RAID set hard disk drive T o verify a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. Select SCSI Disk Utilities from the main menu options, then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the RAID set drives. Use the arrow keys to select the hard disk drive you want to verify , then press <Enter>.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-51 3. Select V erify Disk Media from the menu, then press <Enter>. 4. After verifying the hard disk drive, press <Esc> to exit the utility . Y ou can also use the SCSI Disk Utilities to format the hard disk drive. 6.4.1 1 Making a RAID set bootable T o make a RAID set bootable: 1. Select SCSI Disk Utilities from the main menu options, then press <Enter>.
6-52 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 2. Select the RAID set you want to make bootable, then press <Enter>. 4. When prompted, select Mark bootable , then press <Enter>. 3. Press < B> when the RAID set information displays on screen. The letter â Bâ appears before a bootable RAID set for easy identiï¬Âcation.
3- ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 This chapter provides information on RAID conï¬Âgurations, RAID driver installation, and LAN driver installation for this motherboard. Chapter 7 Driver installation
7-2 Chapter 7: Driver installation 7.1 RAID driver installation After creating the RAID sets for your server system, you are now ready to install an operating system to the independent hard disk drive or bootable array . This part provides instructions on how to install the RAID controller drivers during OS installation. 7.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk Y ou may have to use another system to create the RAID driver disk from the system/motherboard support CD or from the Internet. A ï¬Âoppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î 2000/XP or Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0/SuSE operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. Y ou can create a RAID driver disk in DOS (using the Makedisk application in the support CD). T o create a RAID driver disk in DOS environment: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Restart the computer , then enter the BIOS Setup. 3. Select the optical drive as the ï¬Ârst boot priority to boot from the support CD. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. 4. Restart the computer . 5. Press any key when prompted to boot from CD. The Makedisk menu appears. Loading FreeDOS FAT KERNEL GO! Press any key to boot from CDROM... 6. Place a blank, high-density ï¬Âoppy disk to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then select the type of RAID driver disk you want to create by typing the number before the option 7. Press <Enter>. 8. Follow screen instructions to create the driver disk. For system s with Red Ha t î Enterprise versions that are not listed in the Makedisk menu, explore the support CD and copy the RAID driver disk from the following path: \Drivers\Chipset\ICH\LSI\Driver\Linux.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-3 7.1.2 Installing the RAID controller driver Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS During Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS installation T o install the RAID controller driver when installing Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Boot the computer using the Windows î 2000/2003 Server installation CD. The Windows î 2000/2003 Setup starts. 2. Press <F6> when the message â Press F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver ... â appears at the bottom of the screen. 3. When prompted, press < S> to specify an additional device.
7-4 Chapter 7: Driver installation 4. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. 5. Select the RAID controller driver from the list, then press <Enter>. ⢠For Intel î ICH7R LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID driver , select LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID . ⢠For Adaptec î AIC-7901X SCSI RAID driver , select Adaptec HostRAID U320 Diver ver . 1.02 for Windows 2000/XP/2003 . 6. The Windows î 2000/2003 Setup loads the RAID controller drivers from the RAID driver disk. When prompted, press <Enter> to continue installation. 7. Setup then proceeds with the OS installation. Follow screen instructions to continue.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-5 5. Right-click the RAID controller item, then select Properties. 6. Click the Driver tab, then click the Update Driver button. 7. The Upgrade Device Driver Wizard window appears. Click Next. 8. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. 9. Select the option â Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) , then click Next . 10. The wizard searches the RAID controller drivers. When found, click Next to install the drivers. 1 1. Click Finish after the driver installation is done. T o an existing Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS T o install the RAID controller driver on an existing Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Restart the computer , then log in with Administrator privileges. 2. Windows î automatically detects the RAID controller and displays a New Hardware Found window . Click Cancel. 3. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows î desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 4. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button to display the list of devices installed in the system.
7-6 Chapter 7: Driver installation T o verify the RAID controller driver installation: 1. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows î desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 2. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button. 3. Click the â â sign before the item SCSI and RAID controllers. ⢠For P5MT model, the LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID item should appear . ⢠For P5MT -S model, the Adaptec HostRAID U320 Diver ver . 1.02 for Windows 2000/XP/2003 item should appear . 4. Right-click the RAID controller driver item, then select Properties from the menu. 5. Click the Driver tab, then click the Driver Details button to display the RAID controller drivers. 6. Click OK when ï¬Ânished.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-7 Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 T o install the Intel î ICH7R LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID controller driver when installing Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 OS: 1. Boot the system from the Red Hat î Installation CD. 2. At the boot:, type linux dd , then press <Enter>.
7-8 Chapter 7: Driver installation 4. Select fd0 using the <T ab> key when asked to select the driver disk source. Press <T ab> to move the cursor to OK, then press <Enter>. 3. Select Y es using the <T ab> key when asked if you have the driver disk. Press <Enter>
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-9 6. When asked if you will load additional RAID controller drivers: ⢠For P5MT model, select No, then press <Enter> ⢠For P5MT -S model, select Y es , then install the additional RAID controller drivers (for Adaptec AIC-7901 PCI-X SCSI controller). 7. Follow screen instructions to continue the OS installation. 5. When prompted, insert the Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 RAID driver disk to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, select OK, then press <Enter>. The drivers for the RAID controller are installed to the system.
7-10 Chapter 7: Driver installation SuSE Linux T o install the RAID controller driver when installing SuSE Linux OS: 1. Boot the system from the SuSE Installation CD. 2. Select Installation from the Boot Options menu, then press <Enter>. 3. A message instructs you to prepare the RAID driver disk. Press <F6>.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-11 4. When prompted, insert the RAID driver disk to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. 5. When prompted, select the ï¬Âoppy disk drive (fd0) as the driver update medium, select OK, then press <Enter>. The drivers for the RAID controller are installed to the system.
7-12 Chapter 7: Driver installation 7.2 LAN driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the Broadcom î Gigabit LAN controller drivers. 7.2.1 Windows î 2000/2003 Server T o install the Broadcom î Gigabit LAN controller driver on a Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Restart the computer , then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . ⢠Wi ndo ws î automatically detects the LAN controllers and displays a New Hardware Found window . Click Cancel to close this window . ⢠If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the ï¬Âle ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the CD. 3. Click the Broadcom Lan Driver option to begin installation.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-13 7.2.2 Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 Follow these instructions when installing the Broadcom î Gigabit LAN controller base driver for the Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 operating system. Building the driver from the T AR ï¬Âle Install ï¬Ârst the Kernel Development tools before building the driver from the T AR ï¬Âle. 4. Click Next when the InstallShield Wizard window appears. Follow screen instructions to continue installation. T o build the driver from the T AR ï¬Âle: 1. Create a directory and extract the T AR ï¬Âles: tar xvzf bcm5700-<version>.tar.gz 2. Bui ld the dr iver b cm570 0.o as a loa dable module for the runni ng ker nel: cd bcm5700-<version>/src make 3. T est the driver by loading it: insmod bcm5700.o 4. Install the driver and main page: make install 5. Refer to Red Hat distribution documentation to conï¬Âgure the network protocol and address.
7-14 Chapter 7: Driver installation 7.3 VGA driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the A TI î RAGE XL Video Graphics Adapter (VGA) driver . 7.3.1 Windows î 2000 Server Y ou need to manually install the A TI î RAGE XL VGA driver on a Windows î 2000 Server operating system. T o install the A TI î RAGE XL VGA driver: 1. Restart the computer , then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The support CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . Windows î automatically detects the LAN controller and displays a New Hardware Found window . Click Cancel to close this window . 3. Cl ick th e i te m ATI Ra ge XL Dis pl ay Dr ive r f rom t he Dr ive rs me nu. 4. The AT I Windows 2000 Driver window appears. Click Next . Follow screen instructions to complete installation.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-15 7.3.2 Windows î 2003 Server The Windows î 2003 Server operating system automatically recognizes the A TI î RAGE XL VGA driver during system installation. There is no need to install an additional driver(s) to support the onboard VGA. 7.3.3 Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 The Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 operating system automatically recognizes the A TI î RAGE XL VGA driver during system installation. There is no need to install an additional driver(s) to support the onboard VGA.
7-16 Chapter 7: Driver installation 7.4 Management applications and utilities installation The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, management applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) for updates. 7.4.1 Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the ï¬Âle ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the CD. 7.4.2 Drivers menu The Dr ivers menu s hows t he av ail able d evice driver s if the syste m dete cts in stall ed dev ice s. Ins tall t he ne ces sar y driv ers to activ ate t he device s. The screen display and driver options vary under different operating system versions.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-17 7.4.3 Management Software menu The Management Software menu displays the available network and server monitoring applications. Click on an item to install. 7.4.4 Utilities menu The Utilities menu displays the software applications and utilities that the motherboard supports. Click on an item to install. 7.4.5 Contact information Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. Y ou can also ﬠnd this information on the inside front cover of this user guide.
7-18 Chapter 7: Driver installation
3- ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 This section provides information about the power supply unit and a troubleshooting guide for solving common problems when using the barebone server . Appendix Reference information
Appendix: Reference information A-2 A.1 450 W single power supply A.1.1 General description The 450 W SSI-type single power supply with universal AC input includes PFC and A TX-compliant output cables and connectors. The power supply has 13 plugs labeled P1 to P13. T ake note of the devices to which you should connect the plugs. P2 P1 1 P5 P6 P1 P10 P9 P 12 P13 P7 P2 Motherboard 4-pin 12V power connector P1 Motherboard 24-pin A TX power connector P12 Peripheral device (available); connect this to the SCSI/SA T A backplane P9 Floppy disk drive P13 Peripheral device (available) P5 Peripheral device (available) P6 Peripheral device (available) P7 Peripheral device (available); connect this to the SCSI/SA T A backplane P10 Peripheral device (available); optical drive P1 1 Peripheral device (available) P8 Peripheral device (available) P3 Serial A T A device P4 Serial A T A device P8 P3 P4
A-3 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 A.1.2 Speciï¬Âcations DC Output characteristics Output V oltage Max (A) 3.33V 24 5V 24 12V 43 -12V 0.5 -5V 0.5 5VSB 2.0 Input Characteristics Input V oltage Range Normal Range 1 10 to 127 V ~ 10 A Auto Range 200 to 240 V ~ 5 A Input Frequency Range 50 Hz to 60 Hz
Appendix: Reference information A-4 A.2 Simple ï¬Âxes Some problems that you may encounter are not due to defects on the system or the components. These problems only requires simple troubleshooting actions that you can perform by yourself. Problem Action The power LED on the server or on the monitor do not light up 1. Check if the power cable is properly connected to the power connector in the system rear panel. 2. Make sure that the power cables are connected to a grounded power outlet. 3. Press the power button to make sure that the system is turned on. The keyboard does not work Check if the keyboard cable is properly connected to the PS/2 keyboard port. The mouse does not work Check if the mouse cable is properly connected to the mouse port. The system does not perform power-on self tests (POST) after it was turned on 1. Check the memory modules and make sure you installed the DIMMs the system supports. 2. Make sure that the DIMMs are properly installed on the sockets.
A-5 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 Problem Action The system continuously beeps after it was turned on. 1. Check the memory modules and make sure you installed supported DIMMs. 2. Make sure that the DIMMs are properly installed on the sockets. The message âÂÂNon-system disk or disk errorâ appears 1. Check if a bootable HDD is active. 2. Check if the HDDs are properly installed. Network connection not available 1. Make sure that the network cable is connected to the LAN port on the rear panel. 2. Make sure that you have installed the LAN drivers from the support CD.
Appendix: Reference information A-6
ii Copyright é 2006 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). ASUS provides this manual âÂÂas isâ without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties or conditions of merchantability or ï¬Âtness for a particular purpose. In no event shall ASUS, its directors, ofï¬Âcers, employees, or agents be liable for any indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages (including damages for loss of proï¬Âts, loss of business, loss of use or data, interruption of business and the like), even if ASUS has been advised of the possibility of such damages arising from any defect or error in this manual or product. Speciï¬Âcations and information contained in this manual ae furnished for informational use only , and are subject to change at any time without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by ASUS. ASUS assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual, including the products and software described in it. Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiï¬Âed or altered, unless such repair , modiï¬Âcation of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identiï¬Âcation or explanation and to the ownersü beneï¬Ât, without intent to infringe. E2369 Revised Edition V2 January 2006
iii Contents Notices ........................................................................................................ vii Safety information .................................................................................... viii About this guide ......................................................................................... ix Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 System package contents ........................................................... 1-2 1.2 System speciï¬Âcations ................................................................. 1-3 1.2 System speciï¬Âcations ................................................................. 1-4 1.3 Front panel features ..................................................................... 1-5 1.4 Rear panel features ...................................................................... 1-6 1.5 Internal features ........................................................................... 1-7 1.6 LED information ........................................................................... 1-9 Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2.1 Chassis cover ............................................................................... 2-2 2.1.1 Removing the side cover ................................................ 2-2 2.1.2 Reinstalling the side cover .............................................. 2-3 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................... 2-5 2.3.1 Installing the CPU ........................................................... 2-5 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and airduct assembly .......... 2-8 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-10 2.4.1 Overview ....................................................................... 2-10 2.4.2 Memory conï¬Âgurations .................................................. 2-10 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ...........................................................2-1 1 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM .........................................................2-1 1 2.5 Front panel assembly ................................................................ 2-12 2.5.1 Removing the front panel assembly .............................. 2-1 2 2.5.2 Reinstalling the front panel assembly ........................... 2-1 4 2.6 5.25-inch drives .......................................................................... 2-15 2.7 Hard disk drives ......................................................................... 2-18 2.7.1 Installing a hot-swap SA T A/SCSI HDD ......................... 2-18 2.7.2 Installing an HDD dummy cover ................................... 2-20 2.8 Expansion cards ........................................................................ 2-21 2.8.1 Installing an expansion card ......................................... 2-21 2.8.2 Removing an expansion card ....................................... 2-22
iv Contents 2.9 Cable connections ..................................................................... 2-23 2.9.1 Motherboard connections ............................................. 2-23 2.9.2 SA T A backplane connections ....................................... 2 -24 2.9.3 SCSI backplane connections ........................................ 2-27 2.10 Removable components ............................................................ 2-30 2.10.1 Chassis fan ................................................................... 2-30 2.10.2 HDD blower ................................................................... 2-32 2.10.3 SA T A/SCSI backplane .................................................. 2-35 2.10.4 Floppy disk drive ........................................................... 2-37 2.10.5 Front I/O board .............................................................. 2-39 2.10.6 Chassis footpads and roller wheels .............................. 2-4 1 2.10.7 Power supply unit .......................................................... 2-43 Chapter 3: Installation option Preparing the system for rack mounting ................................................ 3-2 Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4.1 Motherboard layouts .................................................................... 4-2 4.2 Jumpers ........................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Internal connectors .................................................................... 4-10 Chapter 5: BIOS information 5.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 5-2 5.1.1 Creating a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk ....................................... 5-2 5.1.2 AFUDOS utility ................................................................ 5-3 5.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ...................................... 5-6 5.1.4 ASUS Update utility ........................................................ 5-8 5.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................. 5-1 1 5.2.1 BIOS menu screen ........................................................ 5-12 5.2.2 Menu bar ....................................................................... 5-12 5.2.3 Navigation keys ............................................................. 5-12 5.2.4 Menu items ................................................................... 5-13 5.2.5 Sub-menu items ............................................................ 5-13 5.2.6 Conï¬Âguration ï¬Âelds ....................................................... 5-13 5.2.7 Pop-up window ............................................................. 5-13 5.2.8 Scroll bar ....................................................................... 5-13 5.2.9 General help ................................................................. 5-13
v Contents 5.3 Main menu .................................................................................. 5-14 5.3.1 System T ime ................................................................ 5-14 5.3.2 System Date ............................................................... 5-14 5.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ........................................................ 5-14 5.3.4 IDE Conï¬Âguration .......................................................... 5-15 5.3.5 Primary , Secondary , Third, Fourth IDE Master/Slave ... 5-16 5.3.6 System Information ....................................................... 5-18 5.4 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 5-19 5.4.1 MPS Conï¬Âguration ........................................................ 5-19 5.4.2 CPU Conï¬Âguration ........................................................ 5-20 5.4.3 Chipset Conï¬Âguration ................................................... 5-22 5.4.4 Onboard Devices Conï¬Âguration .................................... 5-26 5.4.5 PCI PnP ........................................................................ 5-27 5.5 Power Conï¬Âguration .................................................................. 5-28 5.5.1 ACPI APIC support ....................................................... 5-28 5.5.2 APM conï¬Âguration ......................................................... 5-28 5.5.3 Hardware Monitor ......................................................... 5-31 5.6 Server menu ............................................................................... 5-33 Remote Access Conï¬Âguration ...................................................... 5-33 5.7 Boot menu .................................................................................. 5-35 5.7.1 Boot Device Priority ...................................................... 5-35 5.7.2 Boot Settings Conï¬Âguration .......................................... 5-36 5.7.3 Security ......................................................................... 5-37 5.8 Exit menu .................................................................................... 5-40 Chapter 6: RAID Conï¬Âguration 6.1 Setting up RAID ............................................................................ 6-2 6.1.1 RAID deï¬Ânitions .............................................................. 6-2 6.1.2 Installing hard disk drives ................................................ 6-3 6.1.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS ........................................ 6-3 6.1.4 RAID conï¬Âguration utilities .............................................. 6-4 6.2 LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Setup Utility .......................... 6-5 6.2.1 Creating a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set .................................... 6-6 6.2.2 Creating a RAID 10 set ..................................................6-1 1 6.2.3 Adding or viewing a RAID conï¬Âguration ....................... 6-15 6.2.4 Initializing the logical drives .......................................... 6-18 6.2.5 Rebuilding failed drives ................................................. 6-23 6.2.6 Checking the drives for data consistency ..................... 6-25
vi Contents 6.2.7 Deleting a RAID conï¬Âguration ....................................... 6-28 6.2.8 Selecting the boot drive from a RAID set ...................... 6-29 6.2.9 Enabling the WriteCache .............................................. 6-30 6.3 Global Array Manager ................................................................ 6-30 6.4 Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility! (P5MT -S model only) ........... 6-31 6.4.1 Conï¬Âguring the SCSI controller .................................... 6-32 6.4.2 Enabling the HostRAID controller ................................. 6-3 3 6.4.3 Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) ...................................... 6-3 4 6.4.4 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) ...................................... 6-37 6.4.5 Creating a RAID 10 set (Stripe Mirror) ......................... 6-41 6.4.6 Adding a spare drive to a RAID 10 set .......................... 6-45 6.4.7 Deleting a RAID 10 set spare drive ............................... 6-4 6 6.4.8 Deleting a RAID set ...................................................... 6-48 6.4.9 Rebuilding a RAID set ................................................... 6-49 6.4.10 V erifying a RAID set hard disk drive ............................. 6-50 6.4.1 1 Making a RAID set bootable ......................................... 6-51 Chapter 7: Driver installation 7.1 RAID driver installation ............................................................... 7-2 7.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk ............................................ 7-2 7.1.2 Installing the RAID controller driver ................................ 7-3 7.2 LAN driver installation ............................................................... 7-12 7.2.1 Windows î 2000/2003 Server ........................................ 7-12 7.2.2 Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 ......................................... 7-13 7.3 VGA driver installation .............................................................. 7-14 7.3.1 Windows î 2000 Server ................................................. 7-14 7.3.2 Windows î 2003 Server ................................................. 7-15 7.3.3 Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 ......................................... 7-15 7.4 Management applications and utilities installation ................ 7-16 7.4.1 Running the support CD ............................................... 7-16 7.4.2 Drivers menu ................................................................. 7-16 7.4.3 Management Software menu ........................................ 7-17 7.4.4 Utilities menu ................................................................ 7-17 7.4.5 Contact information ....................................................... 7-17 Appendix: Reference information A.1 450 W single power supply ......................................................... A-2 A.1.1 General description ......................................................... A-2 A.1.2 Speciï¬Âcations .................................................................. A-3 A.2 Simple ï¬Âxes .................................................................................. A-4
vii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturer üs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. W ARNING! The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiï¬Âcations to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user üs authority to operate this equipment. Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Th is cla ss B di git al app ar at us com pli es w ith Ca nad ia n ICE S-0 03.
viii Safety information Electrical Safety ⢠Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power cables for the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged. ⢠T o prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to ï¬Âx it by yourself. Contact a qualiï¬Âed service technician or your dealer . Operation Safety ⢠Any mechanical operation on this server must be conducted by certiï¬Âed or experienced engineers. ⢠Before operating the server , carefully read all the manuals included with the server package. ⢠Before using the server , make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If any damage is detected, contact your dealer as soon as possible. ⢠T o avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry . ⢠A void dust, humidity , and temperature extremes. Place the server on a stable surface. This product is equipped with a three-wire power cable and plug for the user üs safety . Use the power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock. Lithium-Ion Battery W arning CAUTION! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer . Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer üs instructions. CD-ROM Drive Safety W arning CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Heavy System CAUTION! This server system is heavy . Ask for assistance when moving or carrying the system.
ix About this guide Audience This user guide is intended for system integrators and experienced users with at least basic knowledge of conï¬Âguring a server . Contents This guide contains the following parts: 1. Chapter 1: Product Introduction This chapter describes the general features of the server , including sections on front panel and rear panel speciï¬Âcations. 2. Chapter 2: Hardware setup This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing or removing system components. 3. Chapter 3: Installation options This chapter describes how to install optional components into the barebone server . 4. Chapter 4: Motherboard information This chapter gives information about the motherboard that comes with the server . This chapter includes the motherboard layout, jumper settings, and connector locations. 5. Chapter 5: BIOS information This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus and describes the BIOS parameters. 6. Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration This chapter provides information on how toconï¬Âgure your hard disk drives as RAID sets. 7. Chapter 7: Driver installation This chapter provides information on how to create a RAID set and how to install the drivers for system components. This chapter also describes the software applications that the barebone server supports. 8. Appendix: Reference information This section provides information about the power supply unit and a troubleshooting guide for solving common problems when using the barebone server .
x Reference Visit the ASUS websites worldwide that provide updated information for all ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information for details. W ARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. IMPORT ANT : Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task. NOTE: T ips and information to aid in completing a task. Conventions T o make sure that you perform certain tasks properly , take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual.
1- ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 This chapter describes the general features of the barebone server , including sections on the front panel and rear panel speciï¬Âcations. Chapter 1 Product introduction
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-2 1.1 System package contents Check your ASUS TS300-E3 package with the items on the following table. The package contents vary for the following conï¬Âgurations: ⢠P A4 (four hot-swap Serial A T A hard disk drives) ⢠PS4 (four hot-swap SCSI hard disk drives) Conï¬Âguration Item description P A4 PS4 ASUS TS300-E3 5U rackmount chassis with: ⢠ASUS P5MT motherboard ⢠ASUS P5MT -S motherboard ⢠450 W single power supply ⢠SA T A backplane board ⢠SCSI backplane board ⢠Floppy disk drive ⢠9 cm Blower ⢠12 cm Chassis fan ⢠Hot-swap HDD trays (including HDD screws) 4 4 ⢠Chassis roller wheels 4 4 ⢠Front I/O board ⢠Dummy covers Cables ⢠AC power cable ⢠SA T A signal cables ⢠SCSI signal cables ⢠SMBus cable System screws and cables System keys ( 2 pcs.) Bundled CDs ⢠TS300-E3 support CD with ASWM* ⢠Computer Associates î eT rust ⢠anti-virus CD Documentation ⢠ASUS TS300-E3 user guide ⢠ASUS ASWM 2.0 user guide Optional items ⢠52x IDE CD-ROM or 16X DVD-ROM drive ⢠ASUS TS300-E3 rackmount rail kit *ASUS System Web-based Management
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 1-3 1.2 System speciï¬Âcations The ASUS TS300-E3 is a barebone server system featuring the ASUS P5MT Series motherboard. The server supports an Intel î Pentium î 4/Pentium î D processor in the 775-land package, and includes the latest technologies through the chipsets embedded on the motherboard. (continued on the next page) Chassis Pedestal or rackmount 5U with removable front door bezel and chassis foot stand or roller-wheels. Motherboard ASUS P5MT (P A4 model) ASUS P5MT -S (PS4 model) A TX compatible form factor: 12 in x 9.6 in Chipset Northbridge: Intel î E7230 Memory Controller Hub (MCH) Southbridge: Intel î ICH7R I/O Bridge: Intel î 6702 PXH Processor Intel î Pentium î 4/Intel î Pentium î D processor in the 775-land pack age wi th Exte nded M emory 6 4-bit T echn olog y (EM6 4T) Supports Dual Core technology Front Side Bus 1066/800/533 MHz Memory Dual-channel memory architecture 4 x 240-pin DIMM sockets support ECC/non-ECC unbuffered 667/533 MHz DDR2 memory modules Supports 256 MB up to 8 GB of system memory LAN Dual Broadcom î BCM5721 G ig a bi t L AN co n tr o ll ers - PCI Express 1.0a speciï¬Âcations compliant Storage For P A4 model only Intel î ICH7R Southbridge supports: - 4 x Serial A T A 3 Gb/s hard disk drives - RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and RAID 5 (with limited OS support) conï¬Âguration - Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology - LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID controller (RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10) For PS4 model only Adaptec AIC-7901 SCSI controller supports: - 1 x Ultra 320 SCSI channel with RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 10 conï¬Âguration - Zero-Channel RAID (optional)
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-4 1.2 System speciï¬Âcations * Only PS4 model supports Zero Channel RAID (ZCR). ** If you install a PCI Express VGA card, the link speed downgrades to x1 due to chipset limitation. This limitation applies only to VGA cards. Expansion slots 1 x PCI 33 MHz/32-bit/5V (PCI 2.3) 1 x PCI-X 100 MHz/64-bit slot (PCI-X 1.0) 1 x PCI-X 100 MHz/64-bit slot (supports ZCR, PCI-X 1.0)* (colored green on PS4 model) 1 x PCI Express⢠x16 slot (x8 Link)** 1 x Mini-PCI socket for the ASUS Server Management Board Drive bays 1 x 3.25-inch FDD bay 3 x 5.25-inch drive bays Front panel 2 x USB 2.0 ports Rear panel 1 x Serial port 1 x Parallel port 1 x PS/2 keyboard port 1 x PS/2 mouse port 2 x LAN (RJ-45) ports 2 x USB 2.0 ports 1 x VGA port Management ASUS Server Web-based Management (ASWM) 2.0 ASUS Server Monitoring Agent (ASMA) Hardware monitors V oltage, temperature, CPU and memory utilization, storage capacity , and fan speed monitoring Automatic Server Restart (ASR) feature Power supply 450 W single power supply (with 24-pin and 4-pin power plugs)
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 1-5 1.3 Front panel features The TS300-E3 chassis displays a stylish front bezel with lock. The bezel covers the system components on the front panel and serves as security . Open the bezel to access the front panel components. The drive bays, power and reset buttons, LED indicators, CD-ROM drive, ï¬Âoppy drive, and USB 2.0 ports are located on the front panel. For future installation of 5.25-inch devices, two drive bays are available. CD-ROM drive Empty 5.25-inch bays Power button Reset button Message LED HDD access LED Power LED Floppy disk drive Security lock Drive bays USB 2.0 ports
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-6 1.4 Rear panel features The rear panel includes a slot for the motherboard rear I/O ports, expansion slots, a chassis lock and intrusion switch, a vent for the system fan, and power supply module. 12 cm system fan Chassis intrusion switch Expansion slots Gigabit LAN ports Po wer supp ly mo dule PS/2 mouse port PS/2 keyboard port USB 2.0 ports Serial port VGA port Parallel port Po wer connector
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 1-7 1.5 Internal features The barebone server system includes the basic components as shown. The photo below shows the TS300-E3 with the hard disk drive blower installed. The HDD blower circulates cool air within the system. 1 1. Power supply unit 2. Chassis fan 3. ASUS P5MT motherboard 4. Chassis intrusion switch 5. Expansion card locks 6. Optical drive 7. 2 x 5.25-inch drive bays 8. HDD blower (HDD drive cage inside) 9. Front I/0 board 10. SA T A backplane P A4 (4 hot-swap SA T A conï¬Âguration) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠â¢
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-8 1 1. Power supply unit 2. Chassis fan 3. ASUS P5MT -S motherboard 4. Chassis intrusion switch 5. Expansion card locks 6. Optical drive 7. 2 x 5.25-inch drive bays 8. HDD blower (HDD drive cage inside) 9. Front I/0 board 10. SCSI backplane PS4 (4 hot-swap SCSI conï¬Âguration) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠â¢
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 1-9 1.6 LED information The barebone system comes with ï¬Âve LED indicators. Refer to the following table for the LED status description. System and HDD LED *SCSI Access Fault-T olerant Enclosure (on PS4 model only) ! Power LED (blue) HDD Access LED (green) Message LED (red) Driv e Status LED (g reen/re d) Drive Activity LED (green) The Power , HDD Access, and Message LEDs are visible even if the system front bezel is closed. LED Icon Display status Description System Power LED ON Blinking System power ON System is in suspend mode HDD Access LED OFF Blinking No activity Read/write data into the HDD Message LED OFF Blinking System is normal; no incoming event ASMS indicates a HW monitor event Hard disk drives Drive Status LED Green Red Green/Red - Blinking Bridge board connected to backplane Installed HDD is in good condition HDD failure HDD rebuilding using the RAID card SAF-TE* function Drive Activity LED Blinking Read/write data into the HDD
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-10
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2- This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing or removing system components. Chapter 2 Hardware setup
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-2 2.1 Chassis cover The chassis features a âÂÂscrewless designâ that allows convenient assembly and disassembly . Y ou can simply push or slide mechanical bolts and locks to remove the cover . 2.1.1 Removing the side cover 1. Remove the two screws that secure the cover to the chassis. 2. Slide the side cover for about half an inch toward the rear until it is disengaged from the chassis. 3. Carefully lift the cover and set it aside. Viewing the internal structure Without the side cover , the internal structure and installed components of the barebone server vary depending on the model you purchased. Refer to section âÂÂ1.5 Internal featuresâ for the different model conï¬Âgurations. Perform the procedures in the succeeding sections to install the CPU, system memory , disk drives, and expansion cards; replace fans and power supply; and connect the system cables. 1 1 2
2-3 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.1.2 Reinstalling the side cover T o reinstall the side cover: 1. Match and insert the upper hooks and lower sliding edge of the cover to the corresponding chassis holes and edge. 2. Slide the cover toward the front until it snaps in place. Y ou may need to remove some of the installed components to access the DIMM sockets and internal connectors. Refer to section âÂÂ2.10 Removable componentsâ for instructions. 3. Drive in the two screws you removed earlier to secure the side cover . 2 3 3
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-4 2.2 Motherboard overview The barebone server comes with the P5MT (P A4 model) or P5MT -S (PS4 model) motherboard already installed. The motherboard is secured to the chassis by nine (9) screws as indicated by the circles in the illustration below . Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing any motherboard component or connection. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. LAN2 î Place this side towards the rear of the chassis Refer to âÂÂChapter 4 Motherboard informationâ for detailed information on the motherboard.
2-5 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.3.1 Installing the CPU T o install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel î Pentium î 4 processor in the 775-land package Before installing the CPU, make sure that the socket box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. LAN2 î P5MT Series CPU Socket 775 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. Retention tab Load lever This side of the socket box should face you. PnP cap A B T o prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-6 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135ú angle. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and foreï¬Ânger to a 100ú angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket. The socket alignment key should ï¬Ât into the CPU notch. Alignment key Gold triangle mark Load plate A B
2-7 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 The CPU ï¬Âts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. A B The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with the Intel î Enhanced Memory 64 T echnology (EM64T), Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST), and Hyper-Threading T echnology . Refer to the Appendix for more information on these CPU features.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-8 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and airduct assembly The TS300-E3 comes with a proprietary CPU heatsink and airduct, which come in separate boxes when you receive the package. Y ou have to assemble the CPU heatsink and airduct before installing to the motherboard. T o assemble the CPU heatsink and airduct: 1. Align the airduct pegs to the fan and heatsink holes. 2. Push down the airduct into the holes to secure the assembly . T o install the CPU heatsink and airduct assembly: 1. Locate the four screw holes on the motherboard.
2-9 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2. Position the CPU heatsink and airduct assembly on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the heatsink screws match the screw holes on the motherboard. 3. Drive the four screws into the holes in a diagonal sequence to secure the heatsink and airduct assembly to the motherboard. A A B B 2 3 3 3 3 4. Connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_F AN1. Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug the connector . LAN2 î P5MT Series CPU fan connector CPU_F AN1 CPU_FAN1 GND F ANPWR PWM ROT AT IO N
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-10 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate II (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets to support 240-pin DDR modules. The ï¬Âgure illustrates the location of the DDR DIMM sockets: 2.4.2 Memory conï¬Âgurations Y ou may install 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, and 2 GB unbuffered ECC or non-ECC DDR2-533/667 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency . For optimum compatibility , it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor . Refer to the DDR2 Qualiï¬Âed V endors List at the ASUS web site. ⢠When installing one or two DIMMs, install the DIMM(s) to the blue slots (DIMM_A2/DIMM_B2). ⢠Three DDR DIMMs intalled into any three memory sockets will function in single-channel mode. LAN2 î P5MT Series 240-pin DDR2 DIMM sockets DIMM_A1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_A2 1 12 Pins 128 Pins
2-1 1 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. T o install a DIMM: 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM T o remove a DIMM: 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it ï¬Âts in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. DO not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Unlocked retaining clip DDR2 DIMM notch 3 2 1 Support the DIMM lightly with your ï¬Ângers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it ï¬Âips out with extra force. 1 2 1 DDR2 DIMM notch
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-12 Before you can install a 5.25-inch drive, you should ï¬Ârst remove the front panel assembly (front bezel and front panel cover). The front panel assembly is attached to the chassis through three hooked tabs on the left side and four hinge-like tabs on the right side. T o remove the front panel assembly: 1. Locate the four hooked tabs on the chassis side rail. 2. Press each lock tab to release the front panel from the chassis. 2.5 Front panel assembly 2.5.1 Removing the front panel assembly 3. Pull and swing the left edge of the front panel outward.
2-13 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 Do not use too much force when removing the front panel assembly . 4. Unhook the hinge-like tabs from the holes on the right side of the front panel to completely detach the front panel assembly from the chassis. Hinge-like tab
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-14 2.5.2 Reinstalling the front panel assembly T o reinstall the front panel assembly (front bezel and front panel cover): 1. Insert the four hinge-like tabs to the holes on the right edge of the chassis. 2. Swing the front panel to the left and ï¬Ât the four (4) hooked tabs to the left side of the chassis until the tabs snap back in place. Hinge-like tab 1 1 1 1 2
2-15 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.6 5.25-inch drives Three 5.25-inch drive bays are located on the upper front part of the chassis. A CD-ROM drive that comes standard with the system package occupies the uppermost bay (labeled 1). The two lower bays (labeled 2 and 3) are available for additional 5.25-inch devices. If you have previously used and powered up the system, and that it may be connected to an AC power source, make sure to unplug the power cable before installing or removing any system components. Failure to do so may cause damage to the motherboard and other system components! T o install a 5.25-inch drive: 1. Use a Phillips (cross) screwdriver to remove the screws that secure the metal cover of the bay where you want to install the drive. 2. Insert the optical drive into the 5.25-inch drive bay . 1 2 3
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-16 5. Connect the IDE cable to the IDE connector on the back of the drive. 6. Connect a 4-pin plug from the power supply to the power connector on the back of the drive. IDE cable Power plug 3. Make sure that the drive and bay hole align as shown. When in place, the drive protrudes about an inch from the front panel. 4. Secure the drive with a screw .
2-17 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7. On the front panel assembly , detach the plastic bay cover opposite the 5.25-inch drive that you installed by pressing the two hooked tabs on each side of the bay cover . 8. Reinstall the front panel assembly when done. Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.2 Reinstalling the front panel assemblyâ for instructions.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-18 2.7 Hard disk drives 2.7.1 Installing a hot-swap SA T A/SCSI HDD Follow the instructions in this section to install a hot-swap SA T A (P A4 model) or SCSI (PS4 model) hard disk drive (HDD). 1. Open the front bezel to access the hot-swap drive trays. 2. Release a drive tray by pushing the spring lock to the right, then pulling the tray lever outward. The drive tray ejects slightly after you pull out the lever . 3. Firmly hold the tray lever and pull the drive tray out of the bay . 4. An empty drive tray requires a metal bracket for support. Use a Phillips (cross) screwdriver to remove the bracket when you are ready to install a hard disk in the drive tray . Metal bracket T ray lever Spring lock
2-19 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5. Place a SA T A or an SCA SCSI hard disk to the drive tray , and secure it with four screws. 6. Carefully insert drive tray and push it all the way to the depth of the bay until just a small fraction of the tray edge protrudes. 7. Push the tray lever until it clicks, and secures the drive tray in place. The drive tray is correctly placed when its front edge aligns with the bay edge.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-20 2. Press the dummy cover into the slot opening until the hook tab clicks in place. 3. When installed, the dummy cover appears as shown. 2.7.2 Installing an HDD dummy cover The HDD dummy covers come pre-installed on the front panel bezel. In case you removed the covers, follow these steps to re-install them. T o install an HDD dummy cover: 1. From the inside of the front panel assembly , insert the ï¬Âat end of a dummy cover into the slot as shown. The end with the hook tab should be close to the front panel LEDs. Flat end Hook tab
2-21 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.8 Expansion cards Refer to this section when installing expansion cards. 2.8.1 Installing an expansion card T o install an expansion card: 1. Lay the chassis on its side. 2. Locate the metal bracket opposite the slot you want to use. Remove the screw that secures the metal bracket to the chassis. Set aside the metal bracket for future use. 3. Align the card golden ï¬Ângers to the slot and its metal bracket to the slot opening on the chassis. 4. Press the card ï¬Ârmly until it is properly seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the bracket screw you removed earlier . Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause physical injury , and damage to the card and motheboard components!
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-22 2.8.2 Removing an expansion card T o remove an expansion card: 1. Remove the screw that secures the card to the chassis. 2. Carefully remove the card from the slot. 3. Reinstall the metal bracket and secure it to the chassis with the screw that you removed earlier .
2-23 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.9 Cable connections ⢠The bundled system cables are pre-connected before shipment. Y ou do not need to disconnect these cables unless you will remove pre-installed components to install additional devices. ⢠Refer to Chapter 4 for detailed information on the connectors. Standard cables connected to the motherboard 7. SMBus connector 8. Auxiliary panel cable 9. Front USB cable 10. Front panel cable 1 1. Floppy disk drive 12. Primary IDE cable 13. SCSI connector (for PS4 Model only) 1. 24-pin A TX power 2. 4-pin 12V power 3. CPU fan 1/2 4. Rear fan 1/2 5. Front fan 1/2 6. Serial A T A connectors P5MT -S 8Mbit Flash BIOS Super I/O PRI_IDE1 25cm (9.8in) 30.5cm (12in) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) SAT A1 A TI RAGE XL VGA Controller AUX_PANEL1 KBPWR1 PSUSMB1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: Keyboard LAN1 LAN2 î USB12 COM1 P ARALLEL PORT VGA1 USBPW12 REAR_FAN1 ATX12V1 FM_CPU2 CPU_FAN2 FM_CPU1 CPU_FAN1 PCIE1 PCIX3 PCIX2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 SCSIA1 SAT A2 SAT A3 SAT A4 PANEL1 RECOVERY1 USB34 USBPW34 HDLED1 BUZZ1 FLOPPY1 BMCCONN1 TRPWR1 CLRTC1 BPSMB1 VGA_EN1 SB_PWR1 COM2 LAN_EN2 LAN_EN1 Broadcom BCM5721 Broadcom BCM5721 Adaptec AIC-7901 Intel E7230 Intel 6702 PXH Intel ICH7R BMCSOCKET1 LAN2 LGA775 PCI4 SCSI_EN1 A TXPWR1 REAR_FAN2 1 6 10 9 5 3 8 5 2 3 4 2.9.1 Motherboard connections 11 12 13 7
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-24 2.9.2 SA T A backplane connections (in P A4 model only) A SA T A backplane comes pre-installed in the TS300-E3 P A4 model. The SA T A backplane has four 15-pin SA T A connectors to support Serial A T A hard disk drives. The backplane design incorporates a hot swap feature to allow easy connection or removal of SA T A hard disks. The LED on the backplane connect to the front panel LED to indicate HDD status. See section âÂÂ1.6 LED informationâ for details. Front side The front side of the SA T A backplane faces the front panel when installed. This side includes four SA T A connectors for the hot swap drive trays. Drive status LEDs CON1 CON3 CON5 CON7 Each SA T A connector is labeled (CON1, CON3, CON5, CON7) so you can easily determine their counterpart connectors at the back side of the backplane. Refer to the table for reference. HDD device Front side connector Back side connector HDD 1 CON1 CON2 HDD 2 CON3 CON4 HDD 3 CON5 CON6 HDD 4 CON7 CON8
2-25 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 Back side The back side of SA T A backplane faces the rear panel when installed. This side includes the power connectors, SA T A interfaces for the motherboard Serial A T A connectors or the SA T A/RAID card, an HDD fan connector , and SMBus connectors. Fan connector (for HDD fan) P o we r c on n e c t o r s (connect power plugs from the power supply) The back side SA T A connectors are attached to the motherboard SA T A connectors via the supplied SA T A cables. Refer to the illustration below for the location of the SA T A connectors. Refer to the table on the right for the default SA T A cable connections. CON2 CON4 CON6 CON8 Upper 6-1 pins: SMBus connector (connects the SMB cable from the BPSMB1 connector on the motherboard) SA T A2 S A T A R A I D c o n t r o l l e r P5MT 8Mbit Flash BIOS Super I/O PRI_IDE1 25cm (9.8in) 30.5cm (12in) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) SATA1 ATI RAGE XL VGA Controller AUX_PANEL1 KBPWR1 PS/2KBMS T: Mouse B: Keyboard LAN1 LAN2 î USB12 COM1 PARALLEL PORT VGA1 PCIE1 PCIX3 PCIX2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 SATA2 SATA3 SATA4 PANEL1 RECOVERY1 USB34 USBPW34 HDLED1 BUZZ1 FLOPPY1 BMCCONN1 TRPWR1 BPSMB1 VGA_EN1 SB_PWR1 COM2 LAN_EN2 LAN_EN1 Broadcom BCM5721 Broadcom BCM5721 Intel E7230 Intel 6702 PXH Intel ICH7R BMCSOCKET1 LAN2 LGA775 PCI4 PSUSMB1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power USBPW12 REAR_FAN1 ATX12V1 FM_CPU2 CPU_FAN2 FM_CPU1 CPU_FAN1 CLRTC1 ATXPWR1 REAR_FAN2 RAID_SEL1 SA T A4 SA T A1 SA T A3 Backplane ID Connected to (on motherboard) Controlled by CON2 SA T A1 Intel î ICH7R CON4 SA T A2 Intel î ICH7R CON6 SA T A3 Intel î ICH7R CON8 SA T A4 Intel î ICH7R
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-26 SA T A backplane jumper settings and HDD ID assignments The 6-pin jumper J3 allows you to deï¬Âne your desired SA T A conï¬Âguration. The picture below shows the location of jumper J3 with pins 1-3 and 2-4 shorted. Refer to the table for the jumper settings and the appropriate ID# for each SA T A HDD bay . J3 setting (1-3 shorted, 2-4 shorted) Device SA T A ID# Drive Bay 1 ID0 Drive Bay 2 ID1 Drive Bay 3 ID2 Drive Bay 4 ID3
2-27 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.9.3 SCSI backplane connections (in PS4 model only) A SCSI backplane comes pre-installed in the TS300-E3 PS4 model. The SCSI backplane has four 68-pin SCSI connectors to support SCA SCSI hard disks. The backplane design incorporates a hot swap feature to allow easy connection or removal of SCSI hard disks. The LEDs on the backplane connect to the front panel LEDs to indicate HDD access, HDD failure, thermal failure, or fan failure. See section âÂÂ1.6 LED information.â Front side The front side of the SCSI backplane faces the front panel when installed. This side includes four SCSI connectors for the hot swap drive trays. HDD status LEDs HDD activity LEDs Disk drive 1 Disk drive 2 Disk drive 3 Disk drive 4
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-28 Back side The back side of SCSI backplane faces the rear panel when installed. This side includes the power connectors, SCSI interfaces for the motherboard SCSI connector or the SCSI/RAID card and terminator , an HDD fan connector , and SMBus connectors. ⢠the upper SCSI interface of the backplane connects to the motherboard SCSI connector or the SCSI/RAID card ⢠a SCSI multi-mode terminator (L VD/SE) is connected to the lower SCSI interface of the backplane 68-pin SCSI connector (connects the SCSI cable from the motherboard SCSI connector or the SCSI/RAID card) SMBus connector [SMB_IN1] (connects the SMB cable from the motherboard) Fan connector (for HDD fan) P o we r c on n e c t o r s (connect power plugs from the power supply) 68-pin SCSI connector (with SCSI multi-mode terminator)
2-29 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 Refer to the following tables for the jumper settings and the appropriate ID# for each SCSI HDD bay . SCSI backplane jumper settings and HDD ID assignments The 6-pin jumper J1 on each of the SCSI backplanes allows you to deï¬Âne your desired SCSI conï¬Âguration. The picture below shows the location of jumper J1 with pins 1-3 and 2-4 shorted. J1 setting (1-3 shorted, 2-4 shorted) Device SCSI ID# Drive Bay 1 ID0 Drive Bay 2 ID1 Drive Bay 3 ID2 Drive Bay 4 ID3 GEM SAF-TE ID15 (SCSI channel-0)
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-30 2.10.1 Chassis fan T o remove the chassis fan: 1. Unplug the chassis fan cable fron the REAR_F AN1 connector on the motherboard. 2.10 Removable components Y ou may need to remove previously installed system components when installing or removing system devices, or when you need to replace defective components. This section tells how to remove the following components: 2. Locate the four screws that secure the fan to the chassis. 3. Remove the four screws while carefully supporting the chassis fan with your free hand to prevent it from falling off. Set the screws aside. 4. Carefully remove the chassis fan. 1. Chassis fan 2. HDD blowers 3. SA T A/SCSI backplanes 4. Floppy disk drive module 5. Front I/O board 6. Chassis footpads and roller wheels 7. Power supply unit
2-31 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2. Align the chassis fan holes to the screw holes on the chassis. 3. Drive in the four screws you removed earlier to secure the fan to the chassis. 5. Remove the four screws that secure the metal shroud to the fan. Set the screws aside. T o reinstall the chassis fan: 1. Drive in the four screws you removed earlier into the fan screw holes to secure the metal shroud to the fan.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-32 2.10.2 HDD blower T o remove the HDD blower: 1. Remove the side cover . Refer to section âÂÂ2.1.1 Removing the side coverâ for instructions. 2. Disconnect the 3-pin fan cable from the fan connector on the backplane. 3 4. Firmly grip the blower case as shown, then slide it out of the chassis in the direction of the arrow until the tabs are released from the holes of the HDD cage. 3. Loosen the thumb screw that secures the HDD blower case to the chassis. 4. Plug the chassis fan cable to the connector on the motherboard.
2-33 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6. Remove the blower from the case. T o reinstall the HDD blower: 1. Replace the blower into the case. 2. Secure the blower to the case with the two screws you removed earlier . 5. Remove the two screws on the blower case using a Phillips screwdriver . Set the screws aside.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-34 4. Drive in the thumb screw to secure the HDD blower case. 5. Connect the 3-pin fan cable to the fan connector on the backplane. 3. Slide in the blower case as shown, making sure the tabs ï¬Ât into the holes on the HDD cage.
2-35 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.10.3 SA T A/SCSI backplane T o remove the SA T A/SCSI backplane: 1. Remove the HDD blower case. Refer to section âÂÂ2.10.2 HDD blowersâ for instructions. 2. Disconnect all cables from the SA T A/SCSI backplane. When disconnecting a cable, hold and ï¬Ârmly pull the cable plug. DO NOT pull the cable itself. Doing so may damage the cable! 3. From the inner edge, push the backplane outward so that the outer edge protrudes slightly from the slot. 4. From the outer edge, ï¬Ârmly hold the backplane and carefully slide it out.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-36 T o reinstall a SA T A/SCSI backplane: 1. Position the backplane into its slot with the component side facing the rear panel, and the power connectors on top. 2. Align the backplane with the rail- like dents on the slot to ensure that it ï¬Âts securely . 3. Slide the backplane into the slot until it ï¬Âts. If correctly installed, the outer edge of the backplane aligns with the corner of the drive cage. 4. Connect the appropriate cables to the backplane. Refer to sections âÂÂ2.9.2 SA T A backplane connectionsâ and âÂÂ2.9.3 SCSI backplane connectionsâ for details. Rail-like dents
2-37 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.10.4 Floppy disk drive 2. Carefully pull out the drive from the chassis until you see the cables connected to the drive. T o remove the ï¬Âoppy disk drive: 1. Remove the screw that secures the drive to the chassis. Y ou need to remove the front panel assembly before you can remove the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.1 Removing the front panel assemblyâ for instructions. 3. Disconnect the ï¬Âoppy disk cable and power cable from the drive to completely release the drive.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-38 T o install a ï¬Âoppy disk drive: 1. Position the ï¬Âoppy drive vertically with the eject button on the left side (close to the HDDs). 2. Connect the drive signal cable and power cable. 4. Secure the drive cage with a screw . 3. Carefully push the drive into the bay until the drive cage ï¬Âts the front edge of the bay . Floppy drive power cable Floppy drive signal cable Red stripe to match Pin 1 on the connector
2-39 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.10.5 Front I/O board Y ou need to remove the front panel assembly before you can remove the front I/O board. Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.1 Removing the front panel assemblyâ for instructions. T o remove the front I/O board: 1. Remove the screw that secures the front I/O board bracket to the front panel. 4. Remove the screw that secures the I/O board to the bracket. 2. Carefully pull out the bracket until you see the cables connected to the I/O board. 3. Disconnect all the cables from the I/O board.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-40 T o install the front I/O board: 1. Place the I/O board in the bracket, component side up. Secure the front I/O board to the bracket with a screw . 2. Position the I/O board into the bay with the component side to the left (close to the HDDs). Connect the I/O cables to the connectors on the back of the I/O board. 3. Insert the I/O board into the bay until the bracket ï¬Âts the front edge of the bay . 4. Secure the I/O board bracket with a screw . USB 2.0 connector
2-41 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.10.6 Chassis footpads and roller wheels The barebone server system is shipped with four footpads attached to the bottom of the chassis for stability . Y ou need to remove these footpads if: ⢠if you want to replace the footpads with the bundled roller wheels ⢠you wish to install the system to a rack (Refer to âÂÂChapter 3 Installation optionsâ of this user guide, and to the âÂÂRackmount Kitâ user guide for instructions) T o remove the footpads: 1. Lay the system chassis on its side. 2. Use a ï¬Âat screwdriver to ï¬Âip out the top layer of a footpad. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to remove the other three footpads. 3. Remove the footpad by rotating it counterclockwise.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-42 T o remove the chassis wheels: 1. Lay the system chassis on its side. 2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws that secure the wheels to the bottom of the chassis. 3. Repeat step 2 to remove the other three roller wheels. Remove the chassis roller wheels if you wish to mount the system to a rack. For convenient transport, install the roller wheels the came with the system package. Each wheel has a brake lock to stabilize the chassis in place. T o install the chassis wheels: 1. Lay the chassis in its side. 2. Locate the designated screw holes for each of the four wheel sets. T ake note of the numbers alongside each hole when placing screws. 3. Secure each wheel to the bottom of the chassis using four screws. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to install the other three wheels. 3 1 2 4
2-43 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 2.10.7 Power supply unit Refer to this section when removing or installing a power supply unit to the barebone system. Y ou MUST disconnect all power cable plugs from the motherboard and other installed devices before removing the power supply unit. The picture below shows the motherboard and device connectors where the power plugs are connected. Refer to the Appendix at the end of this document for the power supply speciï¬Âcations. 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 Model P A4 1. 24-pin A TX (motherboard power connector) 2. 4-pin 12V (motherboard power connector , hidden behind the cables) 3. 4-pin plug (optical drive) 4. 2 x 4-pin plugs (SA T A backplane) 5. 4-pin plug (ï¬Âoppy disk drive, hidden behind the backplane) Model PS4 1. 24-pin A TX (motherboard power connector) 2. 4-pin 12V (motherboard power connector , hidden behind the cables) 3. 4-pin plug (optical drive) 4. 2 x 4-pin plugs (SCSI backplane) 5. 4-pin plug (ï¬Âoppy disk drive, hidden behind the backplane) 4 5 5 Make sure to unplug ALL power cables from the system devices before removing the power supply unit.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-44 T o remove the power supply unit (PSU): 1. Remove the chassis cover . Refer to section âÂÂ2.1.1 Removing the side cover .â 2. Remove the front panel assembly . Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.1 Removing the front panel assembly . 3. Lay the chassis on a ï¬Âat, stable surface. 4. Locate the four screws on the rear panel. Remove the screws and set them aside. 5. Locate and remove the screws that secure the PSU bracket to the chassis. 6. Slide the bracket in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the chassis.
2-45 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7. Carefully slide the PSU in the direction of the arrow until it disengages from the chassis. T o reinstall the power supply unit: 1. Carefully slide the PSU in the direction of the arrow . 2. Secure the PSU to the chassis with the four screws you removed earlier .
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-46 3. Slide in the PSU bracket. 4. Align the screw holes. 5. Secure the bracket with screws you removed earlier .
3- ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 Chapter 3 Installation option This chapter describes how to install optional components into the barebone server .
Chapter 3: Installation option 3-2 The items required for the optional conï¬Âgurations described in this chapter are not included in the standard barebone system package. These items are purchased separately . Preparing the system for rack mounting Removing the footpads or roller wheels Refer to section âÂÂ2.10.6 Chassis footpads and roller wheelsâ for instructions on removing the footpads or roller wheels. Attaching the rack rails Refer to the installation guide that came with the Rackmount Rail Kit for instructions on how to attach the rails and on the barebone server system and the corresponding rails on the industrial rack. 4. Locate two round mylars on top cover . 5. Carefully remove each mylar using a sharp, ï¬Âat object such as the edge of a cutter . Removing the top cover T o remove the top cover: 1. Remove the chassis cover . Refer to section âÂÂ2.1.1 Removing the side cover .â 2. Remove the front panel assembly . Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.1 Removing the front panel assembly . 3. Carefully slide out the protruding portion of the top cover as shown. 3 We recommend that you allot at least 1U space above the server system to ensure optimal thermal performance.
3- ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 This chapter gives information about the motherboard that comes with the server . This chapter includes the motherboard layout, jumper settings, and connector locations. Chapter 4 Motherboard info
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-2 4.1 Motherboard layouts P5MT model P5MT 8Mbit Flash BIOS Super I/O PRI_IDE1 25cm (9.8in) 30.5cm (12in) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) SAT A1 A TI RAGE XL VGA Controller AUX_PANEL1 KBPWR1 PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: Keyboard LAN1 LAN2 î USB12 COM1 P ARALLEL PORT VGA1 PCIE1 PCIX3 PCIX2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 SAT A2 SAT A3 SAT A4 PANEL1 RECOVERY1 USB34 USBPW34 HDLED1 BUZZ1 FLOPPY1 BMCCONN1 TRPWR1 BPSMB1 VGA_EN1 SB_PWR1 COM2 LAN_EN2 LAN_EN1 Broadcom BCM5721 Broadcom BCM5721 Intel E7230 Intel 6702 PXH Intel ICH7R BMCSOCKET1 LAN2 LGA775 PCI4 PSUSMB1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power USBPW12 REAR_FAN1 ATX12V1 FM_CPU2 CPU_FAN2 FM_CPU1 CPU_FAN1 CLRTC1 A TXPWR1 REAR_FAN2 RAID_SEL1
4-3 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 P5MT -S model P5MT -S 8Mbit Flash BIOS Super I/O PRI_IDE1 25cm (9.8in) 30.5cm (12in) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) SAT A1 A TI RAGE XL VGA Controller AUX_PANEL1 KBPWR1 PSUSMB1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: Keyboard LAN1 LAN2 î USB12 COM1 P ARALLEL PORT VGA1 USBPW12 REAR_FAN1 ATX12V1 FM_CPU2 CPU_FAN2 FM_CPU1 CPU_FAN1 PCIE1 PCIX3 PCIX2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 SCSIA1 SAT A2 SAT A3 SAT A4 PANEL1 RECOVERY1 USB34 USBPW34 HDLED1 BUZZ1 FLOPPY1 BMCCONN1 TRPWR1 CLRTC1 BPSMB1 VGA_EN1 SB_PWR1 COM2 LAN_EN2 LAN_EN1 Broadcom BCM5721 Broadcom BCM5721 Adaptec AIC-7901 Intel E7230 Intel 6702 PXH Intel ICH7R BMCSOCKET1 LAN2 LGA775 PCI4 SCSI_EN1 A TXPWR1 REAR_FAN2
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-4 Layout contents Jumpers Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) 4-5 2. CPU fan pin selection (3-pin FM_CPU1, FM_CPU2) 4-6 3. USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34) 4-6 4. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) 4-7 5. VGA controller setting (3-pin VGA_EN1) 4-7 6. Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN_EN1; LAN_EN2) 4-8 7. RAID controller selection (3-pin RAID_SEL1) (P5MT model only) 4-8 8. SCSI controller setting (3-pin SCSI_EN1) (P5MT -S model only) 4-9 9. Force BIOS recovery setting (3-pin RECOVERY1) 4-9 Internal connectors Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) 4-10 2. Primary IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) 4-10 3. Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1, SA T A2, SA T A3, SA T A4) 4-1 1 4. Hard disk activity LED connector (4-pin HDLED1) 4-12 5. USB connector (10-1 pin USB34) 4-12 6. Ultra320 SCSI connectors (one 68-pin SCSIA1) (P5MT -S model only) 4-13 7. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) 4-14 8. BMC connector (16-pin BMCCONN1) 4-14 9. Ambient thermal sensor (2-pin TRPWR1) 4-14 10. CPU and system fan connectors (3-pin CPU_F AN1/2, REAR_F AN1/2, FRNT_F AN1/2) 4-15 1 1. Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) 4-15 12. Power supply SMBus connector (5-pin PSUSMB1) 4-16 13. A TX power connectors (24-pin A TXPWR1, 8-pin A TX12V2) 4-16 14. System panel connector (20-pin P ANEL1) 4-17 15. Auxiliary panel connector (20-pin AUX_P ANEL1) 4-18
4-5 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLR TC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! 4.2 Jumpers The grayed out components in the illustrations may not be present in certain models. 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) This jumper allows you to clear the Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. Y ou can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. T o erase the RTC RAM: 1. T urn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery . 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Re-install the battery . 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer . 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. LAN2 î P5MT Series Clear RTC RAM CLRTC1 Normal (Default) Clear CMOS 1 2 2 3
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-6 3. USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34) Set these jumpers to 5V to wake up the computer from S1 sleep mode (CPU stopped, DRAM refreshed, system running in low power mode) using the connected USB devices. Set to 5VSB to wake up from S4 sleep mode (no power to CPU, DRAM in slow refresh, power supply in reduced power mode). ⢠The USB device wake-up feature requires a power supply that can provide 500mA on the 5VSB lead for each USB port; otherwise, the system would not power up. ⢠If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 4 to wake up the system from S4 sleep mode. ⢠The total current consumed must NOT exceed the power supply capability ( 5VSB) whether under normal condition or in sleep mode. 2. CPU fan pin selection (3-pin FM_CPU1, FM_CPU2) These jumpers allow you to connect either a 3-pin or a 4-pin fan cable plug to the CPU fan connectors (CPU_F AN1, CPU_F AN2). Set these jumpers to pins 1-2 if you are using a 3-pin fan cable plug, or to pins 2-3 if you are using a 4-pin plug. LAN2 î P5MT Series FM CPU Setting FM_CPU2 FM_CPU1 1 2 2 3 3-pin fan 4-pin fan (Default) 2 3 2 1 3-pin fan 4-pin fan (Default) LAN2 î P5MT Series USB device wake-up USBPW12 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 3 1 2 USBPW34 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 3 1 2
4-7 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 4. Keyboard/Mouse power (3-pin KBPWR1) Thi s j umper allows you to ena ble or disab le the keyb oar d/mouse wake -up fea tur e. Set this jumpe r t o p ins 2- 3 ( 5V SB) to wake up the c ompute r when you pr ess any key on the key boa rd (th e defa ult is the Spa ce Bar ) or click the mouse. T his featu re req uires an AT X powe r supp ly tha t can su pply a t leas t 1A on the 5VSB lead, and a c orr espond ing se tting in th e B IOS. 5. VGA controller setting (3-pin VGA_EN1) These jumpers allow you to enable or disable the onboard A TI î RAGE-XL PCI VGA controller . Set to pins 1-2 to activate the VGA feature. LAN2 î P5MT Series Keyboard power setting KBPWR1 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 3 1 2 LAN2 î P5MT Series VGA setting VGA_EN1 Enable (Default) Disable 2 1 2 3
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-8 6. Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN_EN1, LAN_EN2) These jumpers allow you to enable or disable the onboard Broadcom î BCM5721 Gigabit LAN1 or LAN2 controller . Set to pins 1-2 to activate the Gigabit LAN controller . LAN2 î P5MT Series LAN_EN1 setting Enable (Default) Disable LAN_EN1 2 1 2 3 LAN2 î P5MT Series LAN_EN2 setting Enable (Default) Disable LAN_EN2 2 1 2 3 7. RAID controller selection (3-pin RAID_SEL1) [P5MT model only] T h is j um pe r al lo ws y ou t o s el ec t th e RA ID c on ï¬Âg ur at i o n ut il it y to u se w he n yo u c r ea te d is k ar ra ys . Pl ac e t he j um pe r ca ps o ve r pi ns 1 -2 i f yo u wa nt t o us e th e LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Setup Utility (default); otherwise, place the jumper caps to pins 2-3 to use the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager . LAN2 î RAID_SEL1 LSI RAID ROM (Default) INTEL RAID ROM 2 1 2 3 P5MT Series RAID_SEL1 setting
4-9 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 9. Force BIOS recovery setting (3-pin RECOVER Y1) This jumper allows you to quickly update or recover the BIOS settings when it becomes corrupted. T o update the BIOS: 1. Prepare a ï¬Âoppy disk that contains the latest BIOS for the motherboard (xxxx-xxx.ROM) and the AFUDOS.EXE utility . 2. Set the jumper to pins 2-3. 3. Insert the ï¬Âoppy disk then turn on the system to update the BIOS. 4. Shut down the system. 5. Set the jumper back to pins 1-2. 6. T urn on the system. 8. SCSI controller setting (3-pin SCSI_EN1) [P5MT -S model only] This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard Adaptec AIC-7901 PCI-X SCSI controller . Set to pins 1-2 to activate the SCSI feature, and support RAID conï¬Âgurations. LAN2 î P5MT Series SCSI_EN1 setting SCSI_EN1 Enable (Default) Disable 2 3 2 1 LAN2 î P5MT Series BIOS recovery setting RECOVERY1 (Default) Normal BIOS recovery 2 3 2 1
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-10 2. Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) Th is con nec to r is for an U lt ra ATA 100 /6 6/ 33 sig nal c ab le. Th e U lt ra AT A 1 00/ 66/ 33 s ign al cab le h as thr ee co nn ect ors : a b lu e c onn ect or f or the pr ima ry IDE c on nec tor on t he mo the rbo ar d, a bla ck co nn ect or for a n Ult ra ATA 10 0/6 6/3 3 I DE s lav e d evi ce ( opt ica l d ri ve /ha rd dis k dr ive ), and a g ray co nne ct or fo r a n U ltr a AT A 1 00/ 66/ 33 I DE mas ter d ev ice (h ard d is k d riv e). I f you in sta ll tw o h ard di sk d riv es, yo u mu st con ï¬Âgu re t he sec ond d ri ve as a s la ve de vic e by se tti ng it s jum per ac co rd ing ly. Re fe r to the ha rd d isk do cum en ta tio n f or th e ju mpe r s ett in gs . 4.3 Internal connectors 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) This connector is for the provided ï¬Âoppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector , then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. ⢠Pi n 2 0 o n t he I DE con nec tor is rem ove d to ma tch th e co ver ed hol e on th e U ltr a AT A c able co nne cto r. T his pr eve nts inc orr ect ins ert ion wh en y ou con nec t th e ID E c able . ⢠Us e t he 80- cond uct or IDE cab le for Ul tra ATA 10 0/6 6/33 ID E d evi ces. LAN2 î NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. P5MT Series Floppy disk drive connector FLOPPY1 PIN 1 LAN2 î P5MT Series IDE connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE1 PI N 1
4-1 1 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 3 . S er i al A TA co n ne c to r s ( 7 -p i n S AT A 1 , S AT A 2, SA T A 3, SA T A4 ) These connectors are for the Serial A T A signal cables for Serial A T A hard disk drives. For P5MT model only: If you installed Serial A T A hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and software RAID 5 conï¬Âguration using the Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology or RAID 0, RAID 1 and RAID 0 1 conï¬Âguration using the LSI MegaRAID î utility embedded on the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge. Serial A T A hard disk drive connection Connector Setting Use SA T A1/SA T A2 Master Boot disk SA T A3/SA T A4 Slave Data disk Thes e conn ectors are se t IDE m ode by defaul t. In IDE mod e, you can co nnect Seri al ATA boot/d ata ha rd disk drive s to th ese co nnector s. If you int end to create a Se rial A TA RAID set u sing th ese co nnector s, set the Conï¬Âgure SA T A as item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section âÂÂ4.3.4 IDE Conï¬Âgurationâ for details. Important notes on Serial A T A ⢠Y ou must install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or Windows î 2003 before using Serial A T A hard disk drives. The Serial A T A RAID feature (RAID 0/RAID 1) is available only if you are using Windows î 2000/2003. ⢠Use only two Serial A T A RAID connectors for each RAID 0 or RAID 1 set. ⢠Wh en usi ng the con nec tor s in ID E m ode , co nne ct the pri mar y ( boo t) h ard di sk driv e t o t he SATA 1 o r S ATA 2 co nne cto r. Refe r t o t he tabl e b elo w f or t he re com mend ed SA T A hard disk drive connections. LAN2 î P5MT Series SA T A connectors SA T A2 GN D RS AT A_ TX P2 RS AT A_ TX N2 GN D RS AT A _R XP2 RS AT A _R XN2 GN D SA T A1 GN D RS AT A_ TX P1 RS AT A_ TX N1 GN D RS AT A _R XP1 RS AT A _R XN1 GN D SA T A4 GN D RS AT A_ TX P4 RS AT A _T XN4 GN D RS AT A _R XP4 RS AT A _R XN4 GN D SA T A3 GN D RS AT A_ TX P3 RS AT A _T XN3 GN D RS AT A _R XP3 RS AT A _R XN3 GN D
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-12 4. Hard disk activity LED connector (4-pin HDLED1) This connector supplies power to the hard disk activity LED. The read or write activities of any device connected to the SCSI connectors or the SA T A connectors cause this LED to light up. 5. USB connector (10-1 pin USB34) This connector is for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. This USB connector complies with USB 2.0 speciï¬Âcation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. LAN2 î P5MT Series SCSI/SA T A card activity LED connector HDLED1 1 ADD_IN_CARD_ACT# NC ADD_IN_CARD_ACT# NC LAN2 î USB 5V USB_P3- USB_P3 GND NC P5MT Series USB 2.0 connector USB34 USB 5V USB_P2- USB_P2 GND The USB port module is purchased separately .
4-13 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6. Ultra320 SCSI connectors (one 68-pin SCSIA1) [P5MT -S model only] This motherboard comes with the Adaptec AIC-7901 PCI-X SCSI U320 controller that supports one 68-Pin Ultra320 SCSI connector . The SCSI channel can support a maximum of 15 SCSI devices as speciï¬Âed by Ultra320 standards. SCSI connection notes This motherboard has a 68-Pin Ultra320 SCSI connector . The onboard SCSI chipset incorporates an advanced multimode I/O cell that supports both single-ended (SE), Ultra2, Ultra160, and Ultra320 devices. With Ultra320 devices, the SCSI bus platform performs at full Ultra320 speeds (up to 320MB/s) and extended cabling 12m (or 25m in a point-to- point conï¬Âguration). When an SE device is attached, the bus defaults to an SE speed and 1.5m cable length. Connect SCSI devices as speciï¬Âed. A SCSI channel should have only one type of SCSI standard (e.g. Ultra320, Ultra160, Ultra2, Ultra-Wide). Mixing SCSI devices on a single channel decreases performance of the slower device. LAN2 î P5MT Series Onboard SCSI connectors 35 68 34 1 SCSIA1 68-Pin Ultra320/ Ultra2-Wide SCSI Connector
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-14 7. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The serial port module is purchased separately . 8. BMC connector (16-pin BMCCONN1) This connector is for the ASUS server management card, if available. LAN2 î P5MT Series Serial port2 (COM2) connector PIN 1 COM2 LAN2 î P5MT Series BMC connector BMCCONN1 5VSB 5VSB BMC SMBCLK 12CCLK1 PSON# BMC_RST# PWROK PSONEN# 5VSB 5VSB BMC SMBDA TA 12CDA TA1 FP_PWRBTN# BMC_PRESENT# BMC_SMI# GND 9. Ambient thermal sensor (2-pin TRPWR1) If you want additional thermal monitoring, connect the thermal sensor cable with thermistor (of 1úK or at 25úC, B=3435) to this connector . LAN2 î P5MT Series TRPWR connector TRPWR1 SYS-THEAMAL2 GND
4-15 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 10. CPU and system fan connectors (3-pin CPU_F AN1/2, REAR_F AN1/2, FRNT_F AN1/2) The fa n conn ectors supp ort co oling fans o f 350 mA ~ 740 mA (8.88 W max.) or a total of 2.1 A ~ 4.44 A (53.28 W max.) at 12V . Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector . Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufï¬Âcient air ï¬Âow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! 1 1. Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) This connector allows you to connect SMBus (System Management Bus) devices. Devices communicate with an SMBus host and/or other SMBus devices using the SMBus interface. LAN2 î P5MT Series SMBus connector BPSMB1 1 I2C_CLK GND I2C_DA T A 5V F ANOUT LAN2 î P5MT Series Fan connectors REAR_F AN2 REAR_F AN1 FRNT_F AN1 FRNT_F AN2 CPU_F AN2 CPU_F AN1 CPU_FAN2 REAR_FAN2 REAR_FAN1 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 CPU_FAN1 GND F ANPWR PWM ROT ATION GND F ANPWR PWM ROT ATION GND Rotation F ANPWR GND Rotation F ANPWR GND Rotation F ANPWR GND Rotation F ANPWR
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-16 12. Power supply SMBus connector (5-pin PSUSMB1) This connector is for the power supply SMB cable, if your power supply supports the SMBus function. 13. SSI pow er con nec to rs (2 4-p in AT XP WR1 , 8-pin A TX12V2) T he s e c o nn e ct o rs ar e fo r S S I p ow e r s u pp l y p lu g s . T he po w er s up p ly pl u gs a re d es i gn e d t o ﬠt t h es e co n ne c to r s i n o n ly on e o r i en t at i on . F i n d t he pr o pe r or i en t at i on a nd pu s h d o wn ï¬Âr m ly u nt i l t he co n n ec t or s c o mp l e te l y ﬠt. ⢠Use of an SSI 12 V Speciï¬Âcation 2.0-compliant power supply unit (PSU) that provides a minimum power of 450 W is recommended for a fully- conï¬Âgured system. ⢠By default, four A TX12V2 connector pins are covered to prevent incorrent insertion of a 4-pin A TX 12V power plug. Remove this cover when using a PSU with an 8-pin A TX 12V power plug. ⢠Do not forget to connect the 4-pin or 8-pin A TX 12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠Us e o f a PS U wi th a h igh er p owe r o utp ut i s r eco mme nded wh en con ï¬Âgur ing a sys tem wit h m ore pow er con sum ing dev ice s. The sys tem ma y be com e un sta ble or may no t bo ot up if the pow er is inad equ ate . ⢠Y ou must install a PSU with a higher power rating if you intend to install additional devices. LAN2 î P5MT Series Power supply SMBus connector PSUSMB1 3.3V Remote Sense GND NC PSU_I2CDA TA PSU_I2CCLK LAN2 î P5MT Series A TX power connectors 24-pin Power Connector A TX12V2 A TXPWR1 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts 1 Ground GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC
4-17 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 14. System panel connector (20-pin P ANEL1) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector . The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power , and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector . The IDE LED lights up or ï¬Âashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker . The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠A TX power button/soft-off button (Light Green 2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF . ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power . ⢠Message LED (Brown 2-pin MLED) This connector is for the message LED cable that connects to the front panel message LED. The message LED indicates the booting status. The LED blinks when the system is in the boot process until the oprating system in loaded. The system panel connector is color-coded for easy connection. LAN2 î P5MT Series System panel connector P ANEL1 MLED- GND NC POWERBTN# 5V GND GND NC POWERLED HDLED GND HDLED- POWERLED- MLED NMIBTN# GND RESETBTN# SPKROUT GND
Chapter 4: Motherboard information 4-18 15. Auxiliary panel connector (20-pin AUX_P ANEL1) This connector is for additional front panel features including front panel SMB, locator LED and switch, chassis intrusion, and LAN LEDs. ⢠Front panel SMB (6-1 pin FPSMB) These leads connect the front panel SMBus cable. ⢠LAN activity LED (2-pin LAN1_LED, LAN2_LED) These leads are for Gigabit LAN activity LEDs on the front panel. ⢠Chassis intrusion (2-pin CHASSIS) These leads are for the intrusion detection feature for chassis with intrusion sensor or microswitch. When you remove any chassis component, the sensor triggers and sends a high-level signal to these leads to record a chassis intrusion event. ⢠Locator LED (6-pin LOCA TOR) The se leads are fo r the lo cat or swi tch an d LED on th e f ront p anel. Front panel SMB LAN activity LED Chassis intrusion Locator LED and switch LAN2 î P5MT Series Auxiliary panel connector AUX_P ANEL1 I2C_4_DA TA# LOCA TORLED1 5VSB LOCA TORLED1- LAN1_LINKACTLED- LOCA TORBTN# LAN1_LINKACTLED GND 5VSB I2C_4_CLK# GND GND LAN2_LINKACTLED LOCA TORLED2- LAN2_LINKACTLED- LOCA TORLED2 CASEOPEN PIN1 NC
3- ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus and describes the BIOS parameters. Chapter 5 BIOS information
Chapter 5: Motherboard information 5-2 5.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk.) 2. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS ï¬Âle fails or gets corrupted.) 3. ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. 5.1.1 Creating a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB ï¬Âoppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows î XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB ï¬Âoppy disk to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. b. Click Start from the Windows î desktop, then select My Computer . c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File from the menu, then select Format. A Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk window appears. e. Windows î XP users: Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options ï¬Âeld, then click Start. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS ï¬Âle to the bootable ï¬Âoppy disk. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS ï¬Âle to a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities.
5-3 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5.1.2 AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS ï¬Âle in DOS environment using a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk with the updated BIOS ï¬Âle. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS ï¬Âle that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS T o copy the current BIOS ï¬Âle using the AFUDOS utility: The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS ï¬Âle. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS ï¬Âle to the ï¬Âoppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AM I F irm war e Up dat e U til it y - V ers ion 1 .1 9(A SUS V2 .0 7( 03. 11. 24B B) ) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can M egat rend s, In c. A ll r ights res erve d. Reading ï¬Âash ..... done Write to ï¬Âle...... ok A:\> Main ï¬Âlename Extension name 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable ï¬Âoppy disk you created earlier . 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[ï¬Âlename] where the [ï¬Âlename] is any user-assigned ï¬Âlename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main ï¬Âlename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom ⢠Make sure that the ï¬Âoppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1024 KB free space to save the ï¬Âle. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only . The actual BIOS screen displays may not be the same as shown.
Chapter 5: Motherboard information 5-4 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable ï¬Âoppy disk you created earlier . 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[ï¬Âlename] where [ï¬Âlename] is the latest or the original BIOS ï¬Âle on the bootable ï¬Âoppy disk. Updating the BIOS ï¬Âle T o update the BIOS ï¬Âle using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) and download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle for the motherboard. Save the BIOS ï¬Âle to a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5MT.rom Write the BIOS ï¬Âlename on a piece of paper . Y ou need to type the exact BIOS ï¬Âlename at the DOS prompt. Use the appropriate BIOS ï¬Âle depending on your motherboard model (e.g. P5MT .ROM or P5MTS.ROM ) A:\>afudos /iP5MT.ROM AM I F irm war e Up dat e U til it y - V ers ion 1 .1 9(A SUS V2 .0 7( 03. 11. 24B B) ) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can M egat rend s, In c. A ll r ights res erve d. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during ï¬Âash BIOS Reading ï¬Âle ....... done Reading ï¬Âash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing ï¬Âash ...... done Writing ï¬Âash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility veriï¬Âes the ï¬Âle and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure!
5-5 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5MT.ROM AM I F irm war e Up dat e U til it y - V ers ion 1 .1 9(A SUS V2 .0 7( 03. 11. 24B B) ) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can M egat rend s, In c. A ll r ights res erve d. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during ï¬Âash BIOS Reading ï¬Âle ....... done Reading ï¬Âash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing ï¬Âash ...... done Writing ï¬Âash ...... done Verifying ï¬Âash .... done Please restart your computer A:\>
Chapter 5: Motherboard information 5-6 5.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS ï¬Âle when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Y ou can update a corrupted BIOS ï¬Âle using the motherboard support CD or the ï¬Âoppy disk that contains the updated BIOS ï¬Âle. Recovering the BIOS from a ï¬Âoppy disk T o recover the BIOS from a ï¬Âoppy disk: 1. T urn on the system. 2. Insert the ï¬Âoppy disk with the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the ï¬Âoppy disk for the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... Floppy found! Reading ï¬Âle âÂÂP5MT.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start ï¬Âashing... When found, the utility reads the BIOS ï¬Âle and starts ï¬Âashing the corrupted BIOS ï¬Âle. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! ⢠Prepare the motherboard support CD or the ï¬Âoppy disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility . ⢠Make sure that you rename the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle in the ï¬Âoppy disk according the exact name of your motherboard, e.g. P5MT .ROM or P5MTS.ROM .
5-7 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 Recovering the BIOS from the support CD T o recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Remove any ï¬Âoppy disk from the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then turn on the system. 2. Insert the support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the ï¬Âoppy disk for the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... Floppy not found! Checking for CD-ROM... CD-ROM found! Reading ï¬Âle âÂÂP5MT.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start ï¬Âashing... When no ï¬Âoppy disk is found, the utility automatically checks the optical drive for the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle. The utility then updates the corrupted BIOS ï¬Âle. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle.
Chapter 5: Motherboard information 5-8 Installing ASUS Update T o install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX . 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 5.1.4 ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS ï¬Âle ⢠Download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS ï¬Âle ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Quit all Microsoft î Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility .
5-9 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network trafï¬Âc, or click Auto Select. Click Next. Updating the BIOS through the Internet T o update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next.
Chapter 5: Motherboard information 5-10 Updating the BIOS through a BIOS ï¬Âle T o update the BIOS through a BIOS ï¬Âle: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a ï¬Âle option from the drop-down menu, then click Next. 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS ï¬Âle from the Open window , then click Save. 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-1 1 5.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable ï¬Ârmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section âÂÂ5.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconï¬Âguring your system, or prompted to âÂÂRun SetupâÂÂ. This section explains how to conï¬Âgure your system using this utility . Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the conï¬Âguration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconï¬Âgure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the ï¬Ârmware hub. The ï¬Ârmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility . When you start up the computer , the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On-Self-T est (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST , restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. Y ou can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the ï¬Ârst two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit Menu. See section âÂÂ5.8 Exit Menu.â â¢ The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only , and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle for this motherboard.
5-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.2.2 Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conï¬Âguration Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) conï¬Âguration Boot For changing the system boot conï¬Âguration Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings T o select an item on the menu bar , press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 5.2.3 Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. 5.2.1 BIOS menu screen Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another . System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 06/17/2005] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] IDE Conï¬Âguration System Information Navigation keys General help Menu bar Sub-menu items Conï¬Âguration ï¬Âelds Menu items Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. Use [ENTER]. [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Exit
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-13 5.2.4 Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciï¬Âc items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power , Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 5.2.5 Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. T o display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 5.2.6 Conï¬Âguration ï¬Âelds These ï¬Âelds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user- conï¬Âgurable, you can change the value of the ï¬Âeld opposite the item. Y ou cannot select an item that is not user-conï¬Âgurable. A conï¬Âgurable ï¬Âeld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. T o change the value of a ï¬Âeld, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to âÂÂ5.2.7 Pop-up window .â 5.2.7 Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conï¬Âguration options for that item. 5.2.8 Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not ï¬Ât on the screen. Press the Up/ Down arrow keys or <Page Up> /<Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 5.2.9 General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. Main menu items System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 06/17/2005] Legacy Diskette A[1.44M, 3.5 in] IDE Conï¬Âguration System Information BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Server Security Boot Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit APM Conï¬Âguration Power Management/APM [Enabled] Video Power Down Mode [Suspend] Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend] Suspend Time Out(Minute) [Disabled] Throttle Slow Clock Ratio [50%] Power Button Function [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On by PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On by PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On Ring [Disabled] Power On PME# [Disabled] Power On RTC Alarm [Disabled] Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Scroll bar Pop-up window
5-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 5.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xx] Allows you to set the system time. 5.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 5.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of ï¬Âoppy drive installed. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] Refer to section âÂÂ5.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Mon 05/27/2005] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] IDE Conï¬Âguration System Information Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Use [ENTER]. [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-15 A T A/IDE Conï¬Âguration [Enhanced] Allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the installed operating system (OS). Set to [Enhanced] if you are using native OS, e.g. Windows î 2000/ XP . Set to [Compatible] if you are using legacy OS, e.g. Windows ME/98/NT , MS- DOS. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Compatible] [Enhanced] The items Conï¬Âgure SA T A as and Third, Fourth IDE Master/Slave options appear only when you set the A T A/IDE Conï¬Âguration to [Enhanced]. 5.3.4 IDE Conï¬Âguration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the conï¬Âgurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you wish to conï¬Âgure the item. IDE Conï¬Âguration ATA/IDE Conï¬Âguration [Enhanced] Conï¬Âgure SATA as [IDE] Primary IDE Master : [Not Detected] Primary IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Secondary IDE Master : [Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Third IDE Master : [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave : [Not Detected] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] Set [Compatible Mode] when Legacy OS (i.e. WIN ME, 98, NT4.0, MS DOS)is used. Set [Enhanced Mode] when Native OS (i.e. WIN2000, WIN XP) is used. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. Configure SA T A As [IDE] Sets the conï¬Âguration for the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge chip. If you want to use the Serial A T A hard disk drives as Parallel A T A physical storage devices, set this item to [IDE]. Set this item to [RAID], if you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, or software RAID 5 conï¬Âgurations using the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager or if you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 conï¬Âgurations using the LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Setup Utility . The AHCI allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial A T A features that enhance storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands.
5-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup If you want the Serial A T A hard disk drives to use the Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI), set this item to [AHCI]. For details on AHCI, go to: www .intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012304.htm www .intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012305.htm The SA T A controller is set to Native mode when this item is set to [RAID] or [AHCI]. 5.3.5 Primary , Secondary , Third, Fourth IDE Master/Slave The BIOS automatically detects the connected IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item, then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. Primary IDE Master Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST32122A Size : 2.1GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : Supported Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] Select the type of device connected to the system. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, V endor , Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-conï¬Âgurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. Legacy IDE Channels [SA T A Pri, P A T A Sec] Allows you to set Serial A T A, Parallel A T A, or both, to native mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [SA T A Only] [P A T A Pri, SA T A Sec] [SA T A Pri, P A T A Sec] [P A T A Only] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] Selects the time our value (in seconds) for detecting A T A/A T API devices. Conï¬Âguration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] The item Legacy IDE Channels appears only when you set the A T A/IDE Conï¬Âguration to [Compatible].
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-17 T ype [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are speciï¬Âcally conï¬Âguring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (A T API Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP , LS-120, or MO drive. Conï¬Âguration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector T ransfer) [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] DMA Mode [Auto] Selects the DMA mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] SMART Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting T echnology . Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data T ransfer [Disabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
5-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.3.6 System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system speciï¬Âcations. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. AMI BIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information. Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU speciï¬Âcation. System Memory Displays the auto-detected total system memory . AMIBIOS Version : 08.00.11 Build Date : 12/01/05 Processor Type : Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Speed : 3200 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Total : 1024MB Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-19 5.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. T ake caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect ï¬Âeld values can cause the system to malfunction. MPS Conï¬Âguration CPU Conï¬Âguration Chipset Onboard Devices Conï¬Âguration PCIPnP Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Conï¬Âgure the Multi-Processor Table. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Select MPS Revision. MPS Conï¬Âguration MPS Revision [1.4] 5.4.1 MPS Conï¬Âguration MPS Revision [1.4] Allows you to select the multi-processor system version. Conï¬Âguration options: [1.1] [1.4] v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.
5-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.4.2 CPU Conï¬Âguration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. NOTE: If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conï¬Âgure Advanced CPU settings Module Version: 3C.0B Manufacturer: Intel Brand String: Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Frequency : 3.40 GHz FSB Speed : 800 MHz Cache L1 : 16 KB Cache L2 : 1024 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked (Max:17, Min:14) Ratio Actual Value: 17 Ratio CMOS Setting [ 16] Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Execute Disable Bit [Enabled] Hyper Threading Technology [Enabled] Y ou can only adjust the Ratio CMOS Setting if you installed an unlocked CPU. Refer to the CPU documentation for details. Ratio CMOS Setting [ 16] Sets the ratio between the CPU Core Clock and the Front Side Bus frequency . The default value of this item is auto-detected by the BIOS. Use the < > or <-> keys to adjust the values. Conï¬Âguration options: [8]...[28] Max CPUID V alue Limit [Disabled] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Execute Disable Bit [Enabled] When this item is set to [Disabled], the BIOS forces the XD feature ï¬Âag to always return to (0). Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hyper-Threading T echnology [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper-Threading T echnology . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Hyper-Threading T echnology item appears only when you installed an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Hyper-Threading T echnology . Hyper- Threading is not supported when you installed a dual-core CPU. v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-21 C1E Support [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], BIOS automatically checks the CPU capability to enable C1E support. In C1E mode, the CPU has lower power consumption when idle. Conï¬Âguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Single Logical Processor Mode [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the single logical processor mode for dual-core CPUs. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Intel(R) SpeedStep T echnology [Automatic] Allows you to use the Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology . When set to [Automatic], you can adjust the system power settings in the operating system to use the EIST feature. Se t t his it em t o [ Dis abl ed ] if you do not want to use the EIST . Conï¬Âguration options: [Automatic] [Disabled] The following items appear only when you installed an Intel î Pentium î 4 dual- core CPU. The motherboard comes with a BIOS ï¬Âle that supports EIST .
5-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Onboard LAN Boot ROM [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard LAN controller . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Onboard SCSI Boot ROM [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard SCSI controller . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 5.4.3 Chipset Conï¬Âguration The Chipset Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conï¬Âgure North Bridge feature Advanced Chipset Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. North Bridge Conï¬Âguration South Bridge Conï¬Âguration Intel PCI-X Hub Conï¬Âguration Onboard LAN Boot ROM [Enabled] Onboard SCSI Boot ROM [Enabled]
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-23 NorthBridge Conï¬Âguration The NorthBridge Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the Northbridge related settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced ENABLE: Allow remapping of overlapped PCI memory above the total physical memory. DISABLE: Do not allow remapping of memory. North Bridge Chipset Conï¬Âguration Memory Remap Feature [Enabled] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Conï¬Âgure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Boot Graphics Adapter Priority[PEG/PCI] PEG Port Conï¬Âguration PEG Port [Auto] Memory Remap Feature [Enabled] Allows you to remap the overlap PCI memory over the total physical memory . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR operating frequency . Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [533 MHz] [667 MHz] Conï¬Âgure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. The following sub-items appear when this item is disabled. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM CAS# Latency [5] Controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Conï¬Âguration options: [5] [4] [3] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [6 DRAM Clocks] Controls the latency between the DDR SDRAM active command and the read/write command. Conï¬Âguration options: [2 DRAM Clocks] [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks] [5 DRAM Clocks] [6 DRAM Clocks] DRAM RAS# Precharge [6 DRAM Clocks] Controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DDR SDRAM. Conï¬Âguration options: [2 DRAM Clocks] [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks] [5 DRAM Clocks] [6 DRAM Clocks]
5-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup DRAM RAS# Activate to Precharge Delay [15 DRAM Clocks] Conï¬Âguration options: [4 DRAM Clocks] [5 DRAM Clocks] ~ [15 DRAM Clocks] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PEG/PCI] Allows selection of the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. Conï¬Âguration options: [PEG/PCI] [PCI/PEG] PEG Port Conï¬Âguration PEG Port [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Graphic port. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] SouthBridge Conï¬Âguration The SouthBridge Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the Southbridge related settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced To select number of UHCI USB Ports (USB 1.1) to be enabled. South Bridge Chipset Conï¬Âguration USB Function [4 USB Ports] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] PCIE Ports Conï¬Âguration PCI Express Port 0 [Auto] PCI Express Port 4 [Auto] PCI Express Port 5 [Auto] USB Function [4 USB Ports] Allows you to enable a speciï¬Âc number of USB ports, or disable the USB function. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [2 USB Ports] [4 USB Ports] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller . Conï¬Âguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled]
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-25 PCIE Port Conï¬Âguration PCI Express Port 0 [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Port 0. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] PCI Express Port 4 [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Port 4. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] PCI Express Port 5 [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Port 5. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] Intel PCI-X Hub Conï¬Âguration The Intel PCI-X Hub Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the Intel PCI Express controller related settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Select the decode range for IO. Conï¬Âgure advanced settings for PCI-X Hub I/O Port Decode [4K Decode] VGA 16-Bit Decode [Enabled] I/O Port Decode [4K Decode] Allows you to set the decode range for the I/O controller . Conï¬Âguration options: [4K Decode] [1K Decode] VGA 16-Bit Decode [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the decode for the VGA controller . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
5-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.4.4 Onboard Devices Conï¬Âguration Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Allows BIOS to Enable or Disable Floppy Controller. Conï¬Âgure W83627EHF-A Super IO Chipset Onboard Floppy Controller [Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3FB/IRQ4] Serial Port2 Address [2FB/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Mode [Normal] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Mode [Normal] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Onboard Floppy Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable the onboard ï¬Âoppy disk drive controller . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Allows you to select the Serial Port2 base address. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Mode [Normal] Allows you to select the Serial Port2 mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Normal] [IrDA] [ASK IR] Parallel Port Address [378] Allows you to select the Parallel Port base addresses. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [378] [278] [3BC] Parallel Port Mode [Normal] Allows you to select the Parallel Port mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Normal] [Bi-directional] [ECP] [EPP] [ECP & EPP] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Conï¬Âguration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ7]
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-27 Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced 5.4.5 PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. T ake caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect ï¬Âeld values can cause the system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS conï¬Âgures all the devices in the system. When set to [Y es] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system conï¬Âgures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. Conï¬Âguration options: [No] [Y es] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register . Conï¬Âguration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Y es] When set to [Y es], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Conï¬Âguration options: [No] [Y es] Palette Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the pallete snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] When set to [PCI Device], the speciï¬Âc IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Conï¬Âguration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved] Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] NO : L ets th e BI OS co nï¬Âg ue all t he de vic es in th e sys tem . YE S: Let s t he op era tin g s ys te m co nï¬Âg ure Pl ug a nd Pla y (P nP) de vic es n ot re qui red fo r bo ot if yo ur sys tem h as a Plu g an d P lay op er at ing sy ste m.
5-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.5 Power Conï¬Âguration The Power Conï¬Âguration menu items allow you to change the settings for the ACPI and Advanced Power Management (APM) features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬Âguration options. 5.5.1 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Conï¬Âguration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conï¬Âguration Hardware Monitor Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Include ACPI APIC table pointer to RSDT pointer list. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Sever Boot Exit Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power Enable or disable APM. APM Conï¬Âguration Power Management/APM [Enabled] Video Power Down Mode [Suspend] Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend] Standby Time Out [Disabled] Suspend Time Out [Disabled] Throttle Slow Clock Ratio [50%] System Thermal [Disabled] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Last State] Resume On Ring [Disabled] Resume On LAN [Disabled] Resume By PME# [Disabled] Resume By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Resume By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power Management [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the motherboard Advance Power Management (APM) feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] 5.5.2 APM Conï¬Âguration v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-29 Video Power Down Mode [Suspend] Allows you to select the video power down mode Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Standby] [Suspend] Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend] Allows you to select the hard disk power down mode Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Standby] [Suspend] Standby Time Out [Disabled] Allows you to select the speciï¬Âed time at which the system goes on standy mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [1 Min] [2 Min] [4 Min] [8 Min] [10 Min] [20 Min] [30 Min] [40 Min] [50 Min] [60 Min] Suspend Time Out [Disabled] Allows you to select the speciï¬Âed time at which the system goes on suspend mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [1 Min] [2 Min] [4 Min] [8 Min] [10 Min] [20 Min] [30 Min] [40 Min] [50 Min] [60 Min] Throttle Slow Clock Ratio [50%] Allows you to select duty cycle in throttle mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [87.5%] [75.0%] [62.5%] [50.0%] [37.5%] [25.0%] [12.5%] System Thermal [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the system thermal control feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Thermal Active T emperature [60úC/140úF] Allows you to specify the system thermal control activating temperature. Conï¬Âguration options: [40úC/104úF] [45úC/1 13úF] [50úC/122úF] [55úC/131úF] [60úC/140úF] [65úC/149úF] [70úC/158úF] [75úC/167úF] Thermal Slow Clock Ratio [50%] Allows you to select the duty cycle in the throttle when a thermal override condition occurs. Conï¬Âguration options: [87.5%] [75.0%] [62.5%] [50%] [37.5%] [25%] [12.5%] Power Button Function [On/Off] Allows the system to go into On/Off mode or suspend mode when the power button is pressed. Conï¬Âguration options: [On/Off] [Suspend] The Thermal Active T emperature and Thermal Slow Clock Ratio items appear only when the System Thermal item is set to Enabled.
5-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Restore on AC Power Loss [Last State] When set to Power Off, the system goes into of f state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Conï¬Âguration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Resume On Ring [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the system enables the RI to generate a wake event while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Resume On LAN [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the system enables the LAN to generate a wake event while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Resume By PME# [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the system enables the PME to generate a wake event while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Resume By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to [Enabled], the items RTC Alarm Date, R TC Alarm Hour , RTC Alarm Minute, and RTC Alarm Second appear with set values. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following items appear only when the Power On RTC Alarm item is set to Enabled. RTC Alarm Date (Days) [15] T o set the alarm date, highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection. Conï¬Âguration options: [Everyday] [1] [2] [3]...[31] System T ime [12:30:30] T o set the alarm time, highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-31 Resume By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Allows you to use speciï¬Âc keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 5.5.3 Hardware Monitor Use the down arrow key to display additional items. CPU1T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] MB T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Disabled] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power Hardware Monitor CPU1 Temperature [49úC/120úF] MB Temperature [47úC/114úF] CPU Fan1 Speed [3884RPM] CPU Fan2 Speed [N/A] Front Fan1 Speed [N/A] Front Fan2 Speed [N/A] Rear Fan1 Speed [N/A] Rear Fan2 Speed [N/A] Smart Fan Control [Smart Fan II] CPU1 Temperature [061] MB Temperature [050] VCORE1 Voltage [ 1.320V] VCORE2 Voltage [ 1.258V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.345V] 5V Voltage [ 5.094V] CPU1 Temperature F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. 5VSB Voltage [ 4.980V] VBAT Voltage [ 3.120V] 12V Voltage [12.053V]
5-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup CPU Fan1/2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Front Fan1/2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Rear Fan1/2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU, front, and rear fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the ï¬Âeld shows N/A. Smart Fan Control [Smart Fan II] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Smart Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efï¬Âcient system operation. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Smart Fan] [Smart Fan II] The CPU1 T emper atur e and MB T emper ature i tems a ppear w hen yo u set t he Smar t Fan Control item to [Sma rt Fan ] or [S mart F an II]. CPU1 T emperature [XXX] MB T emperature [XXX] Displays the detected CPU and system threshold temperature when the Smart Fan Control is enabled. VCORE1 V oltage, VCORE2 V oltage, 3.3V V oltage, 5V V oltage, 5VSB V oltage, VBA T V oltage, 12V V oltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage outputs through the onboard voltage regulators.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-33 Remote Access [Enabled] Enables or disables the remote access feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Server Select Remote Access type. Conï¬Âgure Remote Access type and parameters Remote Access [Enabled] Serial port number [COM1] Baudrate [19200] Flow Control [None] Redirection After BIOS POST [Always] Terminal Type [ANSI] VT-UTFB Combo Key Support [Disabled] Media Type [Serial] The following items appear only when the Remote Access item is set to [Enabled]. 5.6 Server menu The Server menu items allow you to customize the server features. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Sever Boot Exit Conï¬Âgure Remote Access. Server Features Remote Access Conï¬Âguration Remote Access Conï¬Âguration The items in this menu allows you to conï¬Âgure the Remote Access features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬Âguration options.
5-34 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Serial port number [COM1] Allows you to select serial port for console redirection. Conï¬Âguration options: [COM1] [COM2] Baudrate [19200] Sets the Serial port settings. Conï¬Âguration options: [1 15200] [57600] [38400] [19200] [9600] Flow Control [None] Allows you to select the ï¬Âow control for console redirection. Conï¬Âguration options: [None] [Hardware] [Software] Redirection After BIOS POST [Always] Sets the redirection mode after the BIOS Power-On Self-T est (POST). Some operating systems may not work when this item is set to Always. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Boot Loader] [Always] T erminal T ype [ANSI] Allows you to select the target terminal type. Conï¬Âguration options: [ANSI] [VT100] [VT -UTF8] VT -UTF8 Combo Key Support [Disabled] Enables or disables the VT -UTF8 combo key support for ANSI or VT100 terminals. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Media T ype [Serial] Selects the media for console redirection. Conï¬Âguration options: [Serial] [LAN] [Serial LAN]
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-35 5.7 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Boot Settings Boot Priority Boot Settings Conï¬Âguration Security Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Speciï¬Âes the Boot Device Priority sequence. A virtual ï¬Âoppy disk drive (Floppy Drive B:) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the ï¬Ârst boot device. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit 5.7.1 Boot Device Priority Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Speciï¬Âes the boot sequence from the available devices. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding menu. Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [ATAPI CD-ROM] 2nd Boot Device [Network: MBA v7.7.5] 3rd Boot Device [Network: MBA v7.7.5] 1st Boot Device [A T API CD-ROM] 2nd Boot Device [Network: MBA v7.7.5] 3rd Boot Device [Network: MBA v7.7.5] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. Conï¬Âguration options: [1st FLOPPY Drive] [Network: MBA v7.7.5 Slot 0400] [Network: MBA v7.7.5 Slot 0300] [Disabled] v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.
5-36 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.7.2 Boot Settings Conï¬Âguration Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system. Boot Settings Conï¬Âguration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Conï¬Âguration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] W ait for ûF1ü If Error [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hit ûDEL ü Message Display [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âÂÂPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST . Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-37 5.7.3 Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬Âguration options. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Password Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a Supervisor Password: 1. Sel ect the C hange Super vis or Passwo rd ite m, the n pres s <En ter >. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conï¬Ârm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. T o change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear clear it by erasing the CMOS Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM. See section âÂÂ4.2 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. To cl ear th e su per vis or pa ss wor d, sel ec t the Ch ang e Su per vis or Pa ss wor d t hen pr es s <E nte r>. Th e me ssa ge âÂÂPa ss wo rd Uni nst al le dâ app ear s.
5-38 Chapter 4: BIOS setup After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Conï¬Âguration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility . View Only allows access but does not allow change to any ï¬Âeld. Limited allows changes only to selected ï¬Âelds, such as Date and T ime. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the ï¬Âelds in the Setup utility . Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conï¬Ârm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully . T o change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-39 Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility . When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Conï¬Âguration options: [Setup] [Always]
5-40 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5.8 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Sever Boot Exit Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults If you made changes to any of the settings in the menus, pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. A conï¬Ârmation window appears and prompts you to either save your changes or cancel the command. Select one of the options from this menu to exit. Exit & Save Changes Select this option then press <Enter>, or simply press <F10>, to save your changes to CMOS before exiting the Setup utility . When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to save your changes and exit Setup. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu. Exit & Discard Changes Select this option then press <Enter> to exit the Setup utility without saving your changes. When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to discard your changes and exit Setup. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu. Discard Changes Select this option then press <Enter> to discard the changes that you made, and restore the previously saved settings. When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to discard the changes, and load the previously saved settings. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 5-41 Load Setup Defaults Select this option then press <Enter> to load the optimized settings for each of the Setup menu items. When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to load the default settings. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu.
5-42 Chapter 4: BIOS setup
3- ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 This chapter provides information on how toconï¬Âgure your hard disk drives as RAID sets. Chapter 6 RAID Conï¬Âguration
6-2 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.1 Setting up RAID The motherboard comes with the following RAID solutions: P5MT model ⢠LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID technology embedded in the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge supports up to two SA T A hard disk drives and RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 10 conï¬Âgurations. P5MT -S model ⢠Adaptec AIC-7901 PCI-X SCSI controller supports SCSI hard disk drives and RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 0 1 conï¬Âgurations. 6.1.1 RAID deï¬Ânitions RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. T wo hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RA ID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conï¬Âguration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 0 1 is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 0 1 conï¬Âguration you get all the beneï¬Âts of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 conï¬Âgurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. JBOD (Spanning) stands for Just a Bunch of Disks and refers to hard disk drives that are not yet conï¬Âgured as a RAID set. This conï¬Âguration stores the same data redundantly on multiple disks that appear as a single disk on the operating system. Spanning does not deliver any advantage over using separate disks independently and does not provide fault tolerance or other RAID performance beneï¬Âts. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy ï¬Ârst the RAID driver from the support CD to a ï¬Âoppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to Chapter 6 for details.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-3 6.1.2 Installing hard disk drives The motherboard supports Serial A T A (both models) and SCSI hard disk drives (P5MT -S model only) for RAID set conï¬Âguration. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array . T o install the SA T A hard disks for RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. Install the SA T A hard disks into the drive bays following the instructions in the system user guide. 2. Connect a SA T A signal cable to the signal connector at the back of each drive and to the SA T A connector on the motherboard. 3. Connect a SA T A power cable to the power connector on each drive. T o install the SCSI hard disks for RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. Install the SCSI hard disks into the drive bays following the instructions in the system user guide. 2. Connect the SCSI interface cable connectors at the back of the SCSI drives. 3. Connect the other end of the SCSI interface cable to the SCSI connector on the motherboard. 6.1.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS Y ou must set the RAID item in the BIOS Setup before you can create a RAID set from SA T A hard disk drives attached to the SA T A connectors supported by the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge chip. T o do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST . 2. Go to the Main Menu, select IDE Conï¬Âguration, then press <Enter>. 3. Set the A T A/IDE Conï¬Âguration item to [Enhanced Mode], then press <Enter>. 4. Set the Conï¬Âgure SA T A As item to [RAID]. 5. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup.
6-4 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.1.4 RAID conï¬Âguration utilities Depending on the RAID connectors that you use, you can create a RAID set using the utilities embedded in each RAID controller . For example, for P5MT model, use the LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Setup Utility if you installed SA T A hard disk drives on the SA T A connectors supported by the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge. For P5MT -S model, use the Adaptec SCSISelect⢠Utility if you installed SCSI hard disk drives to the SCSI connector(s) supported by the Adaptec AIC-7901 PCI-X SCSI controller . Refer to the succeeding sections for details on how to use each RAID conï¬Âguration utility .
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-5 3. The utility main window appears. Use the arrow keys to select an option from the Management Menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the Management Menu descriptions on the next page. At the bottom of the screen is the legend box. The keys on the legend box allow you to navigate through the setup menu options or execute commands. The keys on the legend box vary according to the menu level. 6.2 LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility Th e L SI Log ic E mbe dde d S AT A RAI D S etu p Ut ili ty all ow s you to cr ea te RA ID 0, RA ID 1, or RA ID 10 set (s) fr om S ATA ha rd di sk dr ive s c on ne cte d t o t he S ATA co nne ct or s su ppo rte d b y th e m oth erb oa rd IC H7R Southbridge chip. T o enter the LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Setup Utility: 1. T urn on the system after installing all the SA T A hard disk drives. 2. During POST , the LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Setup Utility automatically detects the installed SA T A hard disk drives and displays any existing RAID set(s). Press <Ctrl> <M> to enter the utility . The LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID auto conï¬Âgures to RAID 1 when the SA T A to RAID Mode is enabled.
6-6 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration Menu Description Conï¬Âgure Allows you to create RAID 0 or RAID 1 set using the Easy Conï¬Âguration or the New Conï¬Âguration command. This menu also allows you to view , add, or clear RAID conï¬Âgurations or select the boot drive Initialize Allows you to initialize the logical drives of a created RAID set Objects Allows you to initialize logical drives or change the logical drive parameters Rebuild Allows you to rebuild failed drives Check Consistency Allows you to check the data consistency of the logical drives of a created RAID set 6.2.1 Creating a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set The LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID Setup Utility allows you to create a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set using two types of conï¬Âgurations: Easy and New . In Easy Conï¬Âguration, the logical drive parameters are set automatically including the size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). In New Conï¬Âguration, you manually set the logical drive parameters and assign the set size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). Using Easy Conï¬Âguration T o create a RAID set using the Easy Conï¬Âguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conï¬Âgure, then press <Enter>. 2. Us e t he arr ow k eys to se le ct Ea sy Con ï¬Âg ur ati on , th en p res s < Ent er >.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-7 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬Âgurable array appears on screen. 3. The ARRA Y SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drives you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y] , where X is the array number , and Y is the drive number . The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
6-8 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬Âgurable array , then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-9 6. Select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 7. Select the RAID level from the menu, then press <Enter>. Yo u n eed at lea st two ide nti cal har d d isk dr ives wh en cre atin g a RA ID 1 se t. 8. When creating a RAID 1 set, select Stripe Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. When creating a RAID 0 set, proceed to step 10. 9. Key-in the stripe size, then press <Enter>. For server system s, we recomme nd tha t you u se a l ower ar ray bl ock siz e. For mult imedia comput er sys tems us ed mai nly for audio and vi deo ed iting, we reco mmend a highe r arra y block size for opt imum p erforma nce.
6-10 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 10. When ï¬Ânished setting the selected logical drive conï¬Âguration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 1 1. When ï¬Ânished setting the selected logical drive conï¬Âguration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 12. Follow steps 5 to 10 to conï¬Âgure additional logical drives. 13. When prompted, save the conï¬Âguration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-1 1 6.2.2 Creating a RAID 10 set Y ou can create a RAID 10 set using four identical hard disk drives. T o create a RAID 10 set using the Easy Conï¬Âguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conï¬Âgure, then press <Enter>. 2. Us e t he arr ow k eys to se le ct Ea sy Con ï¬Âg ur ati on , th en p res s < Ent er >. 3. The ARRA Y SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drive(s) you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y] , where X is the array number, and Y is the drive number . The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
6-12 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬Âgurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬Âgurable array , then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-13 6. Select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 7. Select RAID 10 from the menu, then press <Enter>. Yo u ne ed a t lea st f ou r id ent ic al h ar d dis k dr iv es w hen c re at in g a R AI D 10 s et . 8. Select Stripe Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 9. Key-in the stripe size, then press <Enter>. For server system s, we recomme nd tha t you u se a l ower ar ray bl ock siz e. For mult imedia comput er sys tems us ed mai nly for audio and vi deo ed iting, we reco mmend a highe r arra y block size for opt imum p erforma nce.
6-14 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 10. When ï¬Ânished setting the selected logical drive conï¬Âguration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 1 1. When prompted, save the conï¬Âguration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-15 6.2.3 Adding or viewing a RAID conï¬Âguration Y ou can add a new RAID conï¬Âguration or view an existing conï¬Âguration using the View/Add Conï¬Âguration command. Adding a new RAID conï¬Âguration T o add a new RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. Fro m t he Man agemen t Men u, hig hlight Conï¬Âg ure , t hen p res s < Enter> . 2. Use the arrow keys to select View/Add Conï¬Âguration, then press <Enter>. 3. The ARRA Y SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drive(s) you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y] , where X is the array number , and Y is the drive number . The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
6-16 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬Âgurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬Âgurable array , then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-17 6. Follow steps 6 to 7 of the Creating a RAID set: Using Easy Conï¬Âguration section. 7. Select Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 8. Key-in the desired logical drive size, then press <Enter>. 9. Follow steps 8 to 13 of the Creating a RAID set: Using Easy Conï¬Âguration section to add the new RAID conï¬Âguration.
6-18 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.2.4 Initializing the logical drives After creating the RAID set(s), you must initialize the logical drives. Y ou may initialize the logical drives of a RAID set(s) using the Initialize or Objects command on the Management Menu. Using the Initialize command T o initialize the logical drive using the Initialize command: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Initialize, then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to initialize. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <Enter>.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-19 3. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Y es from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. Y ou may also press <F10> to initialize the drive without conï¬Ârmation. Initializing a logical drive(s) erases all data on the drive. 4. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization.
6-20 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 5. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>. Using the Objects command T o initialize the logical drives using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Objects, then press <Enter>.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-21 2. Select Logical Drive from the Objects sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 3. Select the logical drive to initialize from the Logical Drives sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 4. Select Initialize from the pop-up menu, then press <Enter> to start initialization.
6-22 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 5. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Y es from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. Y ou may also press <F10> to initialize the drive without conï¬Ârmation. 6. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization. 7. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-23 6.2.5 Rebuilding failed drives Y ou can manually rebuild failed hard disk drives using the Rebuild command in the Management Menu. T o rebuild a failed hard disk drive: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Rebuild, then press <Enter>. 2. The PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SA T A ports. Select the drive you want to rebuild, then press <SpaceBar>.
6-24 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 3. After selecting the drive to rebuild, press <F10>. The indicator for the selected drive now shows RBLD. 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to rebuild the drive. 5. When rebuild is complete, press any key to continue.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-25 6.2.6 Checking the drives for data consistency Y ou can check and verify the accuracy of data redundancy in the selected logical drive. The utility can automatically detect and/or detect and correct any dif ferences in data redundancy depending on the selected option in the Objects > Adapter menu. The Check Consistency command is available only for logical drives included in a RAID 1 set. Using the Check Consistency T o check data consistency using the Check Consistency command: 1. From the Management Menu, select Check Consistency , then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to check. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <Enter>.
6-26 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 3. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Y es from the Consistency Check dialog box, then press <Enter>. Y ou may also press <F10> to check the drive consistency . A progress bar appears on screen. 4. While checking the disk consistency , press <Esc> to display the following options. ⢠Stop - Stops the consistency check. The utility stores the percentage of disk checked, When you restart checking, it continues from the last percentage completed rather than from zero percent. ⢠Continue - Continues the consistency check. ⢠Abort - Aborts the consistency check. When you restart checking, it continues from zero percent. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-27 Using the Objects command T o check data consistency using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects, then select Logical Drive from the menu. 2. Use the arrow keys to select the logical dri ve you want to check, then press <Enter>. 3 . S e le ct C he ck C on si st en cy f r o m th e po p- up m en u, t he n p r es s <E nt er >. 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to check the drive. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue.
6-28 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.2.7 Deleting a RAID conï¬Âguration T o delete a RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. From the Management Menu, select Conï¬Âgure > Clear Conï¬Âguration, then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Y es from the Clear Conï¬Âguration? dialog box, then press <Enter>. The utility clears the current array . 3. Press any key to continue.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-29 6.2.8 Selecting the boot drive from a RAID set Y ou must have created a new RAID conï¬Âguration before you can select the boot drive from a RAID set. Refer to the Creating a RAID set: Using New Conï¬Âguration section for details. T o select the boot drive from a RAID set: 1. From the Management Menu, select Conï¬Âgure > Select Boot Drive, then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select the bootable logical drive from the list, then press <Enter>. 3. The logical drive is selected as boot drive. Press any key to continue.
6-30 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.2.9 Enabling the WriteCache Y ou may enable the RAID controller üs WriteCache option to improve the data transmission performance. Wh en you ena ble Wr iteC ach e, you may lo se dat a wh en a p owe r in ter rup tio n oc cur s wh ile tra nsm itt ing or exc han gin g da ta amo ng the dri ves . T o enable WriteCache: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects > Adapter, then press <Enter> to display the adapter properties. 2. Select WriteCache, then press <Enter> to turn the option On (enabled). 6.3 Global Array Manager Y ou may also create a RAID set(s) in Windows î operating environment using the Global Array Manager (GAM) application. The GAM application is available from the motherboard support CD. Refer to the GAM user guide in the motherboard support CD for details. 3. When ï¬Ânished, press any key to continue.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-31 6.4 Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility! (P5MT -S model only) The Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility allows you to create RAID 0, 1, and 0 1 set(s) from SCSI hard disk drives connected to the SCSI connector supported by the Adaptec embedded SCSI controller . T o enter the Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility!: 1. T urn on the system after installing all the SCSI hard disk drives. 2. During POST , the Adaptec SCSI BIOS automatically detects the installed SCSI hard disk drives and displays any existing RAID set(s). Press <Ctrl> <A> to enter the utility . 3. The utility auto-detects the available SCSI channels. Select the SCSI channel, then press <Enter>.
6-32 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.4.1 Conï¬Âguring the SCSI controller Y ou need to conï¬Âgure the SCSI controller before creating a RAID set. After selecting the SCSI channel to use, the utility prompts you to select from the available options. Use the arrow keys to select Conï¬Âgure/View SCSI Controller Settings , then press <Enter>.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-33 6.4.2 Enabling the HostRAID controller T o enable the Adaptec HostRAID controller: 1. Use the arrow keys to select the HostRAID item in the Conï¬Âguration section. 2. Press <Enter> to set the item to Enabled. 3. Press <Esc> to exit. 4. When the utility prompts you to save the changes, select Y es , then press <Enter>. The screen returns to the options menu.
6-34 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.4.3 Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) T o create a RAID 0 set for Performance: 1. After enabling the HostRAID, the utility returns to the initial menu. Use the arrow keys to select Conï¬Âgure/View HostRAID Settings, then press <Enter>. 2. The utility displays the installed SCSI hard disk drives status and menu options. When available, the HDD status shows Free. Press < C>. The utility does not display an installed SCSI HDD(s) with an existing RAID condiguration or is part of an existing RAID set. Use the SCSI Disk Utilities to reformat the HDD(s), or use the previous RAID card to clear the RAID conï¬Âguration on the HDD(s).
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-35 3. Select RAID-0 (High Performance, No Fault T olerance) from the Select RAID T ype menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the Striping Requirements note at the bottom of the screen to determine the number of hard disk drives required for the selected RAID type. 4. Use the arrow keys to select a RAID set member , then press <SpaceBar> to mark. An X mark appears after the selected HDD. 5. Follow the step 4 to select the other members of the RAID set, then press <Enter> when ï¬Ânished.
6-36 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6. Select the stripe size from the menu, then press <Enter>. For server system s, we recomme nd tha t you u se a l ower ar ray bl ock siz e. For mult imedia comput er sys tems us ed mai nly for audio and vi deo ed iting, we reco mmend a highe r arra y block size for opt imum p erforma nce. 7. When prompted, use the keyboard to assign a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>. 8. If you want to make the array bootable, select Y es from the menu, then press <Enter>. 9. When prompted to create the RAID 0 set, select Y es , then press <Enter>. A Build Complete message appears to indicate that you have successfully created the RAID 0 set. The utility erases all data from the selected hard disk drives. Make sure to backup all important data before creating a RAID set.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-37 10. The screen displays the information on the created RAID set. Press <Esc> to exit the utility . 6.4.4 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) T o create a RAID 1 set for Fault T olerance: 1. Follow steps 1 to 2 of the Creating a RAID 0 set section. 2. Select RAID-1 (Fault T olerance) from the Select RAID T ype menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the Mirroring Requirements note at the bottom of the screen to determine the number of hard disk drives required for the selected RAID type.
6-38 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 3. Use the arrow keys to select a RAID set member , then press <SpaceBar> to mark. An X mark appears after the selected HDD. 4. Follow step 3 to select the other members of the RAID set, then press <Enter> when ï¬Ânished. 5. Select Create new RAID-1 from the RAID-1 Build Option menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the options description below . ⢠Create a New RAID-1 - The default option. Select this option when creating a new RAID 1 set. ⢠Copy from ( 0) to ( 1) - Select this option when you want to copy the source drive contents to a target drive, provided that the source is equal to or smaller than the target drive. ⢠Copy from ( 1) to ( 0) - Select this option when you want to copy the source drive contents to a target drive, provided that the source is larger than the target drive.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-39 6. When prompted, use the keyboard to assign a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 7. If you want to make the array bootable, select Y es from the menu, then press <Enter>. 8. When prompted to create the RAID 1 set, select Y es , then press <Enter>. The utility erases all data from the selected hard disk drives. Make sure to backup all important data before creating a RAID set. 9. When a conï¬Ârmation dialogue box appears, select Y es , then press <Enter>. 10. The utility builds the RAID 1 set and displays a progress bar at the center of the screen. Press <Esc> if you want to stop the building process.
6-40 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 1 1. The screen displays the information on the created RAID set. Press <Esc> to exit the utility . A Build Complete message appears to indicate that you have successfully created the RAID 1 set.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-41 6.4.5 Creating a RAID 10 set (Stripe Mirror) T o create a RAID 10 set for Fault T olerance and Performance: 1. After enabling the HostRAID, the utility returns to the initial menu. Use the arrow keys to select Conï¬Âgure/View HostRAID Settings, then press <Enter>. 2. The utility displays the SCSI hard disk drives installed in your computer and the menu options. Press < C>.
6-42 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 3. Select RAID-10 (Fault T olerance, High Performance) from the Select RAID T ype menu, then press <Enter>. 4. Use the arrow keys to select a RAID set member , then press <SpaceBar> to mark. An X mark appears after the selected HDD. 5. Follow the step 4 to select the other members of the RAID set, then press <Enter> when ï¬Ânished. Refer to the Striping/Mirroring Requirements note at the bottom of the screen to determine the number of hard disk drives required for the selected RAID type.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-43 6. Select the stripe size from the menu, then press <Enter>. For server system s, we recomme nd tha t you u se a l ower ar ray bl ock siz e. For mult imedia comput er sys tems us ed mai nly for audio and vi deo ed iting, we reco mmend a highe r arra y block size for opt imum p erforma nce. 7. When prompted, use the keyboard to assign a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 8. If you want to make the array bootable, select Y es from the menu, then press <Enter>. 9. When prompted to create the RAID 10 set, select <Y es>, then press <Enter>. A Build Complete message appears to indicate that you have successfully created the RAID 10 set. The utility erases all data from the selected hard disk drives. Make sure to backup all important data before creating a RAID set.
6-44 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 10. The screen displays the information on the created RAID set. Press <Esc> to exit the utility .
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-45 6.4.6 Adding a spare drive to a RAID 10 set T o add a spare drive to a RAID 10 set: 1. Press <S> from the Conï¬Âgure/View Host RAID Settings menu. 2. Select Add Spare from the Options menu, then press <Enter>. 3. Use the arrow keys to select the spare drive from the list, then press <Enter>. 4. When a conï¬Ârmation dialogue box appears, select Y es , then press <Enter>.
6-46 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 5. The screen displays the information on the added spare drive. Press <Esc> to exit the utility . 6.4.7 Deleting a RAID 10 set spare drive T o delete a RAID 10 set spare drive: 1. From the utility main menu, press <S>, select Delete Spare from the Options menu, then press <Enter>.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-47 3. When a conï¬Ârmation dialogue box appears, select Y es , then press <Enter> to delete the spare drive. 4. Press <ESC> to exit the utility . 2. The screen displays the available spare drive(s). Use the arrow keys to select the spare drive you want to delete, then press <Enter>.
6-48 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.4.8 Deleting a RAID set T o delete a RAID set: 1. Press <D> from the Conï¬Âgure/View Host RAID Settings menu. 3. When prompted, select Y es from the Delete Array? menu, then press <Enter>. Y ou lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID set. Make sure to back up all important data before deleting a RAID set. 4. Press <ESC> to exit the utility . 2. For RAID 0 and RAID 10 set, go to step 3. For a RAID 1 set, select a delete option from the menu (see below), then go to step 3. ⢠Drive ID 1 - Deletes all data on drive 1 ⢠Drive ID 2 - Deletes all data on drive 2 ⢠Drive ID 1 & 2 - Deletes all data on both drives ⢠None - Breaks the array but keeps all existing data on both drives
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-49 6.4.9 Rebuilding a RAID set 2. Press < R>. While rebuilding the array , you can press <Esc> to stop. A pop-up menu appears for conï¬Ârmation. Select Y es to stop rebuilding and return to the main menu. A Build/Rebuild Completed message appears on screen to indicate that you have successfully rebuilt the array . 3. Press any key to return to the main menu. The rebuild option is available only for RAID 1 and RAID 10 sets. T o rebuild a RAID set: 1. From the main menu, select the RAID set you want to rebuild, then press <Enter>.
6-50 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 6.4.10 V erifying a RAID set hard disk drive T o verify a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. Select SCSI Disk Utilities from the main menu options, then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the RAID set drives. Use the arrow keys to select the hard disk drive you want to verify , then press <Enter>.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 6-51 3. Select V erify Disk Media from the menu, then press <Enter>. 4. After verifying the hard disk drive, press <Esc> to exit the utility . Y ou can also use the SCSI Disk Utilities to format the hard disk drive. 6.4.1 1 Making a RAID set bootable T o make a RAID set bootable: 1. Select SCSI Disk Utilities from the main menu options, then press <Enter>.
6-52 Chapter 6: RAID conï¬Âguration 2. Select the RAID set you want to make bootable, then press <Enter>. 4. When prompted, select Mark bootable , then press <Enter>. 3. Press < B> when the RAID set information displays on screen. The letter â Bâ appears before a bootable RAID set for easy identiï¬Âcation.
3- ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 This chapter provides information on RAID conï¬Âgurations, RAID driver installation, and LAN driver installation for this motherboard. Chapter 7 Driver installation
7-2 Chapter 7: Driver installation 7.1 RAID driver installation After creating the RAID sets for your server system, you are now ready to install an operating system to the independent hard disk drive or bootable array . This part provides instructions on how to install the RAID controller drivers during OS installation. 7.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk Y ou may have to use another system to create the RAID driver disk from the system/motherboard support CD or from the Internet. A ï¬Âoppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î 2000/XP or Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0/SuSE operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. Y ou can create a RAID driver disk in DOS (using the Makedisk application in the support CD). T o create a RAID driver disk in DOS environment: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Restart the computer , then enter the BIOS Setup. 3. Select the optical drive as the ï¬Ârst boot priority to boot from the support CD. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. 4. Restart the computer . 5. Press any key when prompted to boot from CD. The Makedisk menu appears. Loading FreeDOS FAT KERNEL GO! Press any key to boot from CDROM... 6. Place a blank, high-density ï¬Âoppy disk to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then select the type of RAID driver disk you want to create by typing the number before the option 7. Press <Enter>. 8. Follow screen instructions to create the driver disk. For system s with Red Ha t î Enterprise versions that are not listed in the Makedisk menu, explore the support CD and copy the RAID driver disk from the following path: \Drivers\Chipset\ICH\LSI\Driver\Linux.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-3 7.1.2 Installing the RAID controller driver Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS During Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS installation T o install the RAID controller driver when installing Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Boot the computer using the Windows î 2000/2003 Server installation CD. The Windows î 2000/2003 Setup starts. 2. Press <F6> when the message â Press F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver ... â appears at the bottom of the screen. 3. When prompted, press < S> to specify an additional device.
7-4 Chapter 7: Driver installation 4. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. 5. Select the RAID controller driver from the list, then press <Enter>. ⢠For Intel î ICH7R LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID driver , select LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID . ⢠For Adaptec î AIC-7901X SCSI RAID driver , select Adaptec HostRAID U320 Diver ver . 1.02 for Windows 2000/XP/2003 . 6. The Windows î 2000/2003 Setup loads the RAID controller drivers from the RAID driver disk. When prompted, press <Enter> to continue installation. 7. Setup then proceeds with the OS installation. Follow screen instructions to continue.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-5 5. Right-click the RAID controller item, then select Properties. 6. Click the Driver tab, then click the Update Driver button. 7. The Upgrade Device Driver Wizard window appears. Click Next. 8. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. 9. Select the option â Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) , then click Next . 10. The wizard searches the RAID controller drivers. When found, click Next to install the drivers. 1 1. Click Finish after the driver installation is done. T o an existing Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS T o install the RAID controller driver on an existing Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Restart the computer , then log in with Administrator privileges. 2. Windows î automatically detects the RAID controller and displays a New Hardware Found window . Click Cancel. 3. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows î desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 4. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button to display the list of devices installed in the system.
7-6 Chapter 7: Driver installation T o verify the RAID controller driver installation: 1. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows î desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 2. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button. 3. Click the â â sign before the item SCSI and RAID controllers. ⢠For P5MT model, the LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID item should appear . ⢠For P5MT -S model, the Adaptec HostRAID U320 Diver ver . 1.02 for Windows 2000/XP/2003 item should appear . 4. Right-click the RAID controller driver item, then select Properties from the menu. 5. Click the Driver tab, then click the Driver Details button to display the RAID controller drivers. 6. Click OK when ï¬Ânished.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-7 Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 T o install the Intel î ICH7R LSI Logic Embedded SA T A RAID controller driver when installing Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 OS: 1. Boot the system from the Red Hat î Installation CD. 2. At the boot:, type linux dd , then press <Enter>.
7-8 Chapter 7: Driver installation 4. Select fd0 using the <T ab> key when asked to select the driver disk source. Press <T ab> to move the cursor to OK, then press <Enter>. 3. Select Y es using the <T ab> key when asked if you have the driver disk. Press <Enter>
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-9 6. When asked if you will load additional RAID controller drivers: ⢠For P5MT model, select No, then press <Enter> ⢠For P5MT -S model, select Y es , then install the additional RAID controller drivers (for Adaptec AIC-7901 PCI-X SCSI controller). 7. Follow screen instructions to continue the OS installation. 5. When prompted, insert the Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 RAID driver disk to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, select OK, then press <Enter>. The drivers for the RAID controller are installed to the system.
7-10 Chapter 7: Driver installation SuSE Linux T o install the RAID controller driver when installing SuSE Linux OS: 1. Boot the system from the SuSE Installation CD. 2. Select Installation from the Boot Options menu, then press <Enter>. 3. A message instructs you to prepare the RAID driver disk. Press <F6>.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-11 4. When prompted, insert the RAID driver disk to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. 5. When prompted, select the ï¬Âoppy disk drive (fd0) as the driver update medium, select OK, then press <Enter>. The drivers for the RAID controller are installed to the system.
7-12 Chapter 7: Driver installation 7.2 LAN driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the Broadcom î Gigabit LAN controller drivers. 7.2.1 Windows î 2000/2003 Server T o install the Broadcom î Gigabit LAN controller driver on a Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Restart the computer , then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . ⢠Wi ndo ws î automatically detects the LAN controllers and displays a New Hardware Found window . Click Cancel to close this window . ⢠If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the ï¬Âle ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the CD. 3. Click the Broadcom Lan Driver option to begin installation.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-13 7.2.2 Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 Follow these instructions when installing the Broadcom î Gigabit LAN controller base driver for the Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 operating system. Building the driver from the T AR ï¬Âle Install ï¬Ârst the Kernel Development tools before building the driver from the T AR ï¬Âle. 4. Click Next when the InstallShield Wizard window appears. Follow screen instructions to continue installation. T o build the driver from the T AR ï¬Âle: 1. Create a directory and extract the T AR ï¬Âles: tar xvzf bcm5700-<version>.tar.gz 2. Bui ld the dr iver b cm570 0.o as a loa dable module for the runni ng ker nel: cd bcm5700-<version>/src make 3. T est the driver by loading it: insmod bcm5700.o 4. Install the driver and main page: make install 5. Refer to Red Hat distribution documentation to conï¬Âgure the network protocol and address.
7-14 Chapter 7: Driver installation 7.3 VGA driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the A TI î RAGE XL Video Graphics Adapter (VGA) driver . 7.3.1 Windows î 2000 Server Y ou need to manually install the A TI î RAGE XL VGA driver on a Windows î 2000 Server operating system. T o install the A TI î RAGE XL VGA driver: 1. Restart the computer , then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The support CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . Windows î automatically detects the LAN controller and displays a New Hardware Found window . Click Cancel to close this window . 3. Cl ick th e i te m ATI Ra ge XL Dis pl ay Dr ive r f rom t he Dr ive rs me nu. 4. The AT I Windows 2000 Driver window appears. Click Next . Follow screen instructions to complete installation.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-15 7.3.2 Windows î 2003 Server The Windows î 2003 Server operating system automatically recognizes the A TI î RAGE XL VGA driver during system installation. There is no need to install an additional driver(s) to support the onboard VGA. 7.3.3 Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 The Red Hat î Enterprise ver . 3.0 operating system automatically recognizes the A TI î RAGE XL VGA driver during system installation. There is no need to install an additional driver(s) to support the onboard VGA.
7-16 Chapter 7: Driver installation 7.4 Management applications and utilities installation The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, management applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) for updates. 7.4.1 Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the ï¬Âle ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the CD. 7.4.2 Drivers menu The Dr ivers menu s hows t he av ail able d evice driver s if the syste m dete cts in stall ed dev ice s. Ins tall t he ne ces sar y driv ers to activ ate t he device s. The screen display and driver options vary under different operating system versions.
ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 7-17 7.4.3 Management Software menu The Management Software menu displays the available network and server monitoring applications. Click on an item to install. 7.4.4 Utilities menu The Utilities menu displays the software applications and utilities that the motherboard supports. Click on an item to install. 7.4.5 Contact information Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. Y ou can also ﬠnd this information on the inside front cover of this user guide.
7-18 Chapter 7: Driver installation
3- ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 This section provides information about the power supply unit and a troubleshooting guide for solving common problems when using the barebone server . Appendix Reference information
Appendix: Reference information A-2 A.1 450 W single power supply A.1.1 General description The 450 W SSI-type single power supply with universal AC input includes PFC and A TX-compliant output cables and connectors. The power supply has 13 plugs labeled P1 to P13. T ake note of the devices to which you should connect the plugs. P2 P1 1 P5 P6 P1 P10 P9 P 12 P13 P7 P2 Motherboard 4-pin 12V power connector P1 Motherboard 24-pin A TX power connector P12 Peripheral device (available); connect this to the SCSI/SA T A backplane P9 Floppy disk drive P13 Peripheral device (available) P5 Peripheral device (available) P6 Peripheral device (available) P7 Peripheral device (available); connect this to the SCSI/SA T A backplane P10 Peripheral device (available); optical drive P1 1 Peripheral device (available) P8 Peripheral device (available) P3 Serial A T A device P4 Serial A T A device P8 P3 P4
A-3 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 A.1.2 Speciï¬Âcations DC Output characteristics Output V oltage Max (A) 3.33V 24 5V 24 12V 43 -12V 0.5 -5V 0.5 5VSB 2.0 Input Characteristics Input V oltage Range Normal Range 1 10 to 127 V ~ 10 A Auto Range 200 to 240 V ~ 5 A Input Frequency Range 50 Hz to 60 Hz
Appendix: Reference information A-4 A.2 Simple ï¬Âxes Some problems that you may encounter are not due to defects on the system or the components. These problems only requires simple troubleshooting actions that you can perform by yourself. Problem Action The power LED on the server or on the monitor do not light up 1. Check if the power cable is properly connected to the power connector in the system rear panel. 2. Make sure that the power cables are connected to a grounded power outlet. 3. Press the power button to make sure that the system is turned on. The keyboard does not work Check if the keyboard cable is properly connected to the PS/2 keyboard port. The mouse does not work Check if the mouse cable is properly connected to the mouse port. The system does not perform power-on self tests (POST) after it was turned on 1. Check the memory modules and make sure you installed the DIMMs the system supports. 2. Make sure that the DIMMs are properly installed on the sockets.
A-5 ASUS TS300-E3/P A4 & PS4 Problem Action The system continuously beeps after it was turned on. 1. Check the memory modules and make sure you installed supported DIMMs. 2. Make sure that the DIMMs are properly installed on the sockets. The message âÂÂNon-system disk or disk errorâ appears 1. Check if a bootable HDD is active. 2. Check if the HDDs are properly installed. Network connection not available 1. Make sure that the network cable is connected to the LAN port on the rear panel. 2. Make sure that you have installed the LAN drivers from the support CD.
Appendix: Reference information A-6